1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
173 by the \SpecialChar LyX
178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
180 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
181 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
182 Documentation mailing list:
183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Note Note
208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
209 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
223 \begin_layout Standard
224 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
225 LatexCommand tableofcontents
232 \begin_layout Chapter
236 \begin_layout Section
237 What is \SpecialChar LyX
241 \begin_layout Standard
243 is a document preparation system.
244 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
245 scripts, publishable books, business
246 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
247 It is unlike most other
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
257 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
273 pt type, left justified, 5
274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
283 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
287 \begin_layout Standard
288 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
293 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
297 \begin_layout Standard
302 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
303 's philosophy: most importantly,
304 the format of all of the manuals.
305 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
306 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
312 manual describes that, too.
315 \begin_layout Section
320 \begin_layout Standard
321 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
322 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
324 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
325 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
331 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
332 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
334 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
335 only a vertical scrollbar.
336 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
337 The first case is large images.
338 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
339 image and use the option
350 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
353 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
354 this doesn't work for equations yet.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
359 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
367 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
374 \begin_layout Section
378 \begin_layout Standard
379 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
381 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
383 Just select the manual you want to read from the
390 \begin_layout Section
391 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
395 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
402 \begin_layout Standard
403 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
404 can be configured via the menu
406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
410 \begin_inset Index idx
413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
420 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 packages are available.
424 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
426 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
428 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
433 \begin_inset space \space{}
436 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
437 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
439 To force \SpecialChar LyX
440 to re-inspect your system, you should use
442 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
446 \begin_inset Index idx
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
450 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
456 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
457 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
460 \begin_layout Section
463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
465 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
474 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 installed, but you will not be
476 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
477 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
478 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
479 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
480 document can always be output as plain text
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 or DocBook classes or packages.
487 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
488 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
491 \begin_layout Standard
492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
493 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
494 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
497 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
505 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
506 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
513 \begin_inset Index idx
516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
525 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
536 \begin_layout Chapter
537 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
541 \begin_layout Section
542 Basic File Operations
543 \begin_inset Index idx
546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
555 \begin_layout Standard
560 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
561 in addition to some more advanced operations:
564 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
602 arg "buffer-new-template"
608 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
642 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
672 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
682 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
716 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
724 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
742 \begin_layout Itemize
756 \begin_layout Itemize
770 \begin_layout Standard
771 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
772 a few minor differences.
775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
786 command lists the available templates.
787 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
788 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
789 and possibly propose text fragments
791 for the document, features
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
795 you would otherwise need to
796 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
802 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
806 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
814 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
820 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
821 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
825 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
833 \begin_layout Standard
834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
866 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
867 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
868 is just that — a big, blank space.
876 \begin_layout Standard
897 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
902 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
905 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
923 will reload the document from disk.
924 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
925 and want to restore it to the last save.
934 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
935 them as your changes.
938 \begin_layout Section
939 Basic Editing Features
940 \begin_inset Index idx
943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
952 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
959 \begin_layout Standard
960 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
961 can perform cut and paste operations
962 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
963 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
964 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
965 editing features and how to access
967 We will start with cut and paste.
970 \begin_layout Standard
971 As you might expect, the
975 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
976 various other editing features.
977 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
981 \begin_layout Itemize
987 \begin_inset Index idx
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset Index idx
1028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 \begin_layout Itemize
1063 \begin_inset Index idx
1066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 \begin_layout Itemize
1095 \begin_inset space ~
1101 \begin_layout Itemize
1105 \begin_inset space ~
1111 \begin_layout Itemize
1115 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1137 \begin_inset Index idx
1140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1165 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1171 \begin_layout Standard
1172 The first three are self-explanatory.
1173 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1174 and other programs by
1195 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1196 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1201 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1202 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1203 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1204 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1205 into individual cells.
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1214 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1215 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1219 \begin_layout Standard
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1230 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1245 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1246 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1247 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space \space{}
1256 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1257 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1265 \begin_inset space ~
1269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1283 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1285 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1294 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1295 start a new paragraph.
1296 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1297 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1311 \begin_inset space ~
1319 \begin_inset space ~
1322 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1325 paste from the primary selection.
1326 This is normally the currently selected text.
1329 \begin_layout Standard
1332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1350 \begin_inset space ~
1356 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1362 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 button to skip the current word.
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1388 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1397 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1399 If the toggle is set, searching for
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 will not match the word
1412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1426 Match whole words only
1428 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1429 to only find complete words, e.
1430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 offers also an advanced
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1471 feature that is described in section
1472 \begin_inset space ~
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1478 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1487 \begin_inset space \space{}
1491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1499 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1501 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1506 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1517 arg "inset-select-all"
1520 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1521 When the cursor is inside an inset
1524 arg "inset-select-all"
1527 selects the content of the inset.
1531 arg "inset-select-all"
1534 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1539 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1542 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1546 \begin_layout Section
1548 \begin_inset Index idx
1551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1558 \begin_inset Index idx
1561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1570 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1580 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1586 or the toolbar button
1592 to undo some mistake.
1593 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1598 or the toolbar button
1605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1612 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1616 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1619 \begin_layout Standard
1620 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1629 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1630 This is a consequence of the 100
1631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1634 step undo limit mentioned above.
1637 \begin_layout Standard
1646 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1648 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1652 \begin_layout Section
1654 \begin_inset Index idx
1657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1666 \begin_layout Standard
1667 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1670 \begin_layout Enumerate
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1680 once anywhere in the edit window.
1681 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1685 \begin_layout Enumerate
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1697 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1703 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1704 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_layout Enumerate
1719 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1724 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1725 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1729 \begin_layout Section
1731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1733 name "sec:Navigating"
1738 \begin_inset Index idx
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 \begin_layout Standard
1752 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1755 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1761 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1764 \begin_layout Itemize
1765 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1767 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1774 or by the toolbar button
1777 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1783 \begin_layout Itemize
1784 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1786 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1789 and use the same menu to return to them.
1790 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1793 \begin_layout Standard
1797 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1802 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1803 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1810 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1811 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1812 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1813 your last editing position.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1821 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1825 \begin_layout Subsection
1827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1829 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1834 \begin_inset Index idx
1837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1838 Navigating ! Outline
1844 \begin_inset Index idx
1847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1856 \begin_layout Standard
1857 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1858 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1859 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1867 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1871 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1872 \begin_inset space ~
1876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1878 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1883 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1887 \begin_layout Standard
1888 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1889 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1890 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1891 dialog and to modify the citation.
1894 \begin_layout Standard
1899 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1900 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1902 Labels and References
1904 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1913 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1917 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1918 you further to control the display.
1923 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1924 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1930 option keeps it in the current view state.
1931 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1935 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1939 3, the subsections of sections
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1943 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1948 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1953 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1963 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1966 \begin_layout Standard
1973 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1974 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1988 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1989 So, for example, you can move section
1990 \begin_inset space ~
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1997 2.4 or after section
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2003 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2016 (or the corresponding key bindings
2024 ) you can change the level of sections.
2025 So you can for example make section
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_layout Standard
2041 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2042 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2045 \begin_layout Subsection
2046 Horizontal Scrolling
2047 \begin_inset Index idx
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2059 \begin_layout Standard
2061 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2067 \begin_inset space \space{}
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2074 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2075 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2076 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2080 \begin_layout Standard
2081 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2085 \begin_layout Itemize
2087 is used on a small tablet computer
2090 \begin_layout Itemize
2091 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 \begin_inset space ~
2116 \begin_layout Itemize
2117 Math constructs with long command names
2120 \begin_layout Standard
2121 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2122 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2124 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2125 windows so that table
2126 \begin_inset space ~
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2132 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2137 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2139 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2140 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2143 \begin_layout Standard
2144 \begin_inset Float table
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2157 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2161 Horizontal scrolling test.
2169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Tabular
2172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2218 \begin_layout Section
2219 Input/Word Completion
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2222 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2227 \begin_inset Index idx
2230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2237 \begin_inset Index idx
2240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2273 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2275 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2276 is used to propose completions.
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2288 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2304 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2308 \begin_inset space ~
2313 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2314 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2324 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2325 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2326 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2327 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2330 \begin_layout Standard
2332 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2333 completions available.
2338 key to accept a proposed completion.
2339 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2340 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2341 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2348 \begin_layout Standard
2349 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2350 ing options for text.
2352 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2354 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2356 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2359 he special math option
2363 enables characters to be composed.
2364 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2365 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2368 , you can then input the characters
2369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2380 to a formula to get it.
2381 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2382 of the math toolbar.
2383 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2387 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2388 's installation folder.
2390 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2391 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2398 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2403 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2404 In the example above,
2409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2441 \begin_layout Section
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset Index idx
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2485 \begin_inset Index idx
2488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2519 \begin_layout Standard
2520 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2534 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2537 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2541 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2548 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2555 \begin_layout Standard
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2588 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2592 \begin_layout Labeling
2593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2597 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2598 LatexCommand nomenclature
2600 description "Tabulator key"
2607 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2609 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2610 \begin_inset space ~
2614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2616 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2623 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2627 , especially section
2628 \begin_inset space ~
2632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2634 reference "subsec:Lists"
2640 If you are still confused, look in the
2645 \begin_inset Newline newline
2653 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2654 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2658 \begin_layout Labeling
2659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2664 LatexCommand nomenclature
2666 description "Escape key"
2674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2681 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2682 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2685 \begin_layout Labeling
2686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2692 \begin_inset space ~
2696 \begin_inset space ~
2703 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2704 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2709 There are three modifier keys:
2712 \begin_layout Labeling
2713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2731 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2732 LatexCommand nomenclature
2734 description "Control key"
2739 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2740 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2744 \begin_layout Itemize
2753 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2756 \begin_layout Itemize
2765 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2768 \begin_layout Itemize
2777 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2781 \begin_layout Labeling
2782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2801 LatexCommand nomenclature
2803 description "Shift key"
2808 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2809 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2812 \begin_layout Labeling
2813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2832 LatexCommand nomenclature
2834 description "Alt or Meta key"
2839 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2840 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2841 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2847 \begin_inset Newline newline
2850 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2852 menu accelerator keys
2855 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2856 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 For example, the sequence
2862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2868 \begin_inset space ~
2872 \begin_inset space ~
2878 \begin_inset space ~
2886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2905 \begin_inset space ~
2911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2921 \begin_layout Standard
2926 manual lists all other things bound to the
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2937 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2938 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2939 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2940 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2941 The \SpecialChar LyX
2942 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2943 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2944 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2946 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2962 followed by a capital
2969 \begin_layout Chapter
2972 \begin_inset Index idx
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2985 \begin_layout Section
2987 \begin_inset Index idx
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2999 \begin_layout Subsection
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3005 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3006 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3007 numbering schemes, and so on.
3008 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3009 and format the title of your document differently.
3012 \begin_layout Standard
3017 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3018 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3019 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3020 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3021 picks one for you by default.
3022 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3025 \begin_layout Subsection
3027 \begin_inset Index idx
3030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3039 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3046 \begin_layout Standard
3047 You can select a class using the
3049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3054 \begin_inset Index idx
3057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3064 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3078 \begin_layout Description
3079 Article for basic articles
3082 \begin_layout Description
3083 Report for basic reports
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Book for writing a book
3090 \begin_layout Description
3091 Letter for US-style letters
3094 \begin_layout Standard
3095 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3096 only uses if you have installed
3097 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3098 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3099 distributions will include
3101 Here are some of the classes.
3102 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3104 Special Document Classes
3113 \begin_layout Description
3114 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3117 \begin_layout Description
3118 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3122 \begin_layout Description
3123 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3127 \begin_layout Description
3128 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3129 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3130 There are three article layouts available.
3131 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3132 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3133 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3134 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3139 sequential numbering
3140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3144 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3145 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3146 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3149 \begin_layout Description
3150 Beamer Layout for presentations
3153 \begin_layout Description
3154 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3155 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3156 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3157 with \SpecialChar LyX
3161 \begin_layout Description
3162 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3165 \begin_layout Description
3167 \begin_inset space ~
3170 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3173 \begin_layout Description
3174 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3177 \begin_layout Description
3178 Foils Used to make transparencies
3181 \begin_layout Description
3182 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3183 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3185 with \SpecialChar LyX
3189 \begin_layout Description
3190 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3191 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3194 \begin_layout Description
3195 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3198 \begin_layout Description
3199 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3202 \begin_layout Description
3203 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3204 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3205 (Is used by this document.)
3208 \begin_layout Description
3209 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3212 \begin_layout Description
3213 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3216 \begin_layout Description
3221 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3222 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3224 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3228 \begin_layout Description
3229 Slides Used to make transparencies
3232 \begin_layout Description
3234 \begin_inset space ~
3237 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3238 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3241 \begin_layout Description
3242 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3245 \begin_layout Standard
3246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3248 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3250 Special Document Classes
3257 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3258 of the document classes.
3261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3265 \begin_layout Standard
3266 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 \begin_inset Index idx
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3291 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3292 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3294 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3300 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3305 , are highly specialized.
3307 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3308 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3309 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3311 by some document class.
3312 There are just too many of them.
3313 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3325 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3326 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3327 document class for a new file.
3329 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3332 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3339 manual for information on how to install them.
3340 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3346 \begin_layout Standard
3347 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3348 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3349 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3350 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 class files to be used for dissertation
3352 s submitted to those universities.
3353 The \SpecialChar LyX
3354 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3356 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3360 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3366 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3373 name "subsec:Modules"
3378 \begin_inset Index idx
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3392 chosen document class.
3393 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3394 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3405 \begin_inset Index idx
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3419 \begin_layout Standard
3420 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3421 packages or file format converters that are not always
3422 installed by default.
3424 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3425 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3426 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3427 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3429 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3430 file without the missing prerequisites.
3431 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3432 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3439 \begin_inset Index idx
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3449 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3454 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3457 \begin_layout Standard
3458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3468 will advise you about these things.
3476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3480 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3485 \begin_inset Index idx
3488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 Document ! Local Layout
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3498 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3499 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3500 : They are intended to be used in
3501 a variety of different documents.
3502 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3503 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3504 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3505 need a specific inset or
3506 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3511 style only that one time.
3512 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3514 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3532 manual for information on how to use it.
3535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3539 \begin_layout Standard
3540 Each class has a default set of options.
3541 Here's a quick table describing them:
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3545 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3553 \begin_inset Tabular
3554 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3555 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_layout Standard
4015 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4021 \begin_layout Standard
4022 You're probably also wondering what
4023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4027 \begin_inset space ~
4031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4035 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4036 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4041 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4046 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4056 headings, there are also
4064 headings, and so on.
4065 We will describe these headings fully in section
4066 \begin_inset space ~
4070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4072 reference "subsec:Headings"
4079 \begin_layout Subsection
4081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4083 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4088 \begin_inset Index idx
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset space ~
4128 \begin_inset space ~
4133 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4135 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4136 doesn't support special options you want to
4137 use for your document.
4138 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4139 -class and its options, you have to read
4143 \begin_layout Standard
4147 \begin_inset space ~
4154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4160 \begin_inset space ~
4165 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4166 You can choose between the following five options:
4169 \begin_layout Labeling
4170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4175 Use default page style of current class.
4178 \begin_layout Labeling
4179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4184 No page numbers or headings.
4187 \begin_layout Labeling
4188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4196 \begin_layout Labeling
4197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4202 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4203 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4204 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4205 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4208 \begin_layout Labeling
4209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4214 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4215 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4221 \begin_inset Index idx
4224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 How they are defined is explained in section
4233 \begin_inset space ~
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4239 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4254 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4261 \begin_layout Subsection
4262 Paper Size and Orientation
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 Document ! Paper size
4273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4275 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You can find the following options in the menu
4286 \begin_inset space ~
4293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4297 \begin_inset Index idx
4300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 \begin_layout Labeling
4310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4314 \begin_inset space ~
4319 What size paper to print on.
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4342 \begin_layout Itemize
4348 \begin_layout Itemize
4351 US letter, US legal, US executive
4354 \begin_layout Itemize
4360 \begin_layout Itemize
4367 \begin_layout Labeling
4368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4373 To choose whether to output as
4384 \begin_layout Labeling
4385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4395 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4398 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4402 name "subsec:Margins"
4407 \begin_inset Index idx
4410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 \begin_inset Index idx
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4429 \begin_layout Standard
4430 Paper margins are set in the menu
4432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4436 \begin_inset Index idx
4439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4448 \begin_layout Standard
4449 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4450 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4451 the paper format and the font size into account.
4454 \begin_layout Subsection
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4459 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4465 That includes the paragraph environments.
4466 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4467 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4468 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4470 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4479 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4481 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4482 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4483 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4486 \begin_layout Section
4487 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 Paragraph ! Indentation
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4504 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4511 \begin_layout Standard
4512 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4513 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4516 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4518 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4519 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4520 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4524 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4530 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4531 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4532 language than English.
4534 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4538 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4539 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4540 into \SpecialChar LyX
4542 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4545 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4547 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4548 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4549 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4557 goes to produce a printable file.
4562 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4564 gives you the ability globally to change
4568 these pre-coded spacings.
4569 We will explain more later.
4572 \begin_layout Subsection
4573 Paragraph Separation
4574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4576 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4581 \begin_inset Index idx
4584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 Paragraph ! Separation
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4601 \begin_inset space ~
4609 \begin_inset space ~
4616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4632 \begin_layout Subsection
4636 \begin_layout Standard
4637 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4640 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4642 \begin_inset space ~
4647 dialog and toggle the
4650 \begin_inset space ~
4655 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4658 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4662 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4663 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4669 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4672 \begin_layout Subsection
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4678 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4709 \begin_inset space ~
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 \begin_inset Index idx
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4735 installed to use this feature.
4740 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4744 \begin_inset space ~
4749 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4750 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4753 \begin_layout Section
4754 Paragraph Environments
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4757 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4762 \begin_inset Index idx
4765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4766 Paragraph ! Environments
4772 \begin_inset Index idx
4775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4776 Paragraph environments|(
4784 \begin_layout Subsection
4788 \begin_layout Standard
4789 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4801 } \SpecialChar ldots
4811 \begin_inset Newline newline
4814 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4816 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4817 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4818 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4827 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 A paragraph environment is simply a
4832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4839 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4840 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4841 scheme, labels, and so on.
4842 Additionally, you can
4843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4850 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4851 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4852 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4853 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4855 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4857 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4860 \begin_layout Standard
4861 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4862 \begin_inset Graphics
4863 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4869 at the left end of the toolbar.
4871 will change the environment of the
4875 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4876 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4877 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4881 \begin_layout Standard
4890 create a new paragraph using the
4894 paragraph environment.
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 because if you are in one of these environments:
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4950 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4954 , rather than resetting it to
4959 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4960 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4966 reference "sec:Nesting"
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 The default paragraph environment is
4983 It creates a plain paragraph.
4985 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4986 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4987 this manual) are in the
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 You can nest a paragraph using the
4999 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5007 \begin_layout Subsection
5009 \begin_inset Index idx
5012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5022 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5023 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 for thanks or contact information.
5033 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5034 places all of this on a separate page
5035 along with today's date.
5036 For other types of documents, the title
5037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5044 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5064 Here's how you use them:
5067 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 Put the title of your document in the
5075 \begin_layout Itemize
5076 Put the author name in the
5083 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5085 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5091 Note that using this environment is optional.
5092 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5093 will automatically insert today's date.
5094 If you don't want a date, use the option
5096 Suppress default date on front page
5100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 \begin_inset space ~
5111 \begin_layout Standard
5112 You can use footnotes to insert
5113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5120 or contact information.
5123 \begin_layout Subsection
5125 \begin_inset Index idx
5128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5137 name "subsec:Headings"
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5145 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5147 takes care of the numbering for you.
5150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5152 \begin_inset Index idx
5155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5156 Section headings ! Numbered
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5169 \begin_layout Enumerate
5175 \begin_layout Enumerate
5181 \begin_layout Enumerate
5187 \begin_layout Enumerate
5193 \begin_layout Enumerate
5199 \begin_layout Enumerate
5205 \begin_layout Enumerate
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5214 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5215 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5220 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5221 You group the book into chapters.
5223 does a similar grouping:
5226 \begin_layout Itemize
5231 is divided into either
5242 \begin_layout Itemize
5254 \begin_layout Itemize
5266 \begin_layout Itemize
5278 \begin_layout Itemize
5290 \begin_layout Itemize
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5311 Not all document types use the
5315 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5320 is the top-level heading.
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5333 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5334 labels it with its number,
5335 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5337 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5351 \begin_inset Index idx
5354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5355 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5364 The unnumbered section headings have a
5365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5372 at the end of their name.
5373 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5374 the table of contents, see section
5375 \begin_inset space ~
5379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5389 Changing the Numbering
5390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5392 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5401 in the Table of Contents.
5402 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5404 Just as certain classes start with
5418 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5428 This is something you can change.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5450 \begin_inset space ~
5454 \begin_inset space ~
5459 you will see two counters.
5464 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5465 numbers a section heading.
5466 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5471 Short Titles of Headings
5472 \begin_inset Index idx
5475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 Section headings ! Short titles
5482 \begin_inset Argument 1
5485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5494 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5503 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5504 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5505 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5510 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5511 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5512 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5513 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5518 \begin_inset space ~
5524 This will insert a box labeled
5525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5529 \begin_inset space ~
5533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5536 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5537 This also works for captions inside floats.
5538 There can only be one short title per title.
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5550 The following information applies to all section headings:
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5554 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5557 \begin_layout Itemize
5558 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5561 \begin_layout Itemize
5562 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5565 \begin_layout Itemize
5566 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5569 \begin_layout Subsection
5573 \begin_layout Standard
5575 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5589 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5590 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5591 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5592 the text they contain.
5593 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5601 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5604 \begin_layout Standard
5605 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5614 when you start a new paragraph.
5615 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5619 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5620 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5621 have to change back to the
5625 environment yourself.
5628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5649 \begin_layout Standard
5650 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5651 time for the differences.
5660 are identical except for one difference:
5664 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5673 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5676 \begin_layout Standard
5677 Here's an example of the
5690 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5692 See – no indentation!
5696 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5697 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5698 the other paragraph.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5702 Here's another example, this time in the
5709 \begin_layout Quotation
5715 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5716 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5717 the first line, then
5721 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5725 you were quoting other text.
5728 \begin_layout Quotation
5729 Here's a new paragraph.
5730 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5731 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 As the examples show,
5739 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5740 They should put quotes in the
5745 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5749 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset Index idx
5767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5788 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5794 \begin_inset Newline newline
5797 Which I did not rehearse!
5801 It could be much worse.
5802 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5804 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5805 indented a bit more than the first.
5806 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5812 \begin_inset Newline newline
5815 And make things look fine
5816 \begin_inset Newline newline
5822 arg "newline-insert newline"
5828 \begin_layout Standard
5833 does not indent both margins.
5834 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5835 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5838 arg "newline-insert newline"
5844 \begin_layout Subsection
5846 \begin_inset Index idx
5849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5867 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5877 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5878 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5887 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5888 lets you provide your own label.
5889 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5890 describing some general features of all four of them.
5893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5900 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5901 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5910 reset the environment to
5914 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5915 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5916 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5924 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5931 \begin_layout Standard
5932 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5933 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5934 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5936 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5937 you read all of section
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5944 reference "sec:Nesting"
5951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5953 \begin_inset Index idx
5956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5972 \begin_layout Standard
5973 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5977 paragraph environment.
5978 It has the following properties:
5981 \begin_layout Itemize
5982 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5986 \begin_layout Itemize
5988 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5991 \begin_layout Itemize
5992 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5996 \begin_layout Itemize
5997 The items can have any length.
5999 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6000 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6007 \begin_layout Itemize
6012 environment inside another
6016 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6020 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6024 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6031 \begin_inset space ~
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6037 reference "sec:Nesting"
6041 for a full explanation of nesting.
6045 \begin_layout Standard
6046 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6055 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6060 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6063 \begin_layout Itemize
6064 The label for the first level
6068 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6072 \begin_layout Itemize
6073 The label for the second level is a dash.
6077 \begin_layout Itemize
6078 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6082 \begin_layout Itemize
6083 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6087 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 Back out to the third level.
6092 \begin_layout Itemize
6093 Back to the second level.
6097 \begin_layout Itemize
6098 Back to the outermost level.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 These are the default labels for an
6107 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6112 dialog in the submenu
6117 \begin_inset Index idx
6120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6132 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6134 \begin_inset space ~
6138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6140 reference "sec:Nesting"
6147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6149 \begin_inset Index idx
6152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6161 name "sec:Enumerate"
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6173 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6174 It has these properties:
6177 \begin_layout Enumerate
6178 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6182 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6187 \begin_layout Enumerate
6189 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6192 \begin_layout Enumerate
6197 environment resets the counter to one.
6200 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 \begin_layout Enumerate
6214 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6215 Items can have any length.
6218 \begin_layout Enumerate
6219 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6222 \begin_layout Enumerate
6223 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6226 \begin_layout Enumerate
6227 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6240 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6242 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6243 labels the four different levels in an
6250 \begin_layout Enumerate
6251 The first level of an
6255 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6259 \begin_layout Enumerate
6260 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6264 \begin_layout Enumerate
6265 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6269 \begin_layout Enumerate
6270 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6273 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6279 \begin_layout Enumerate
6280 Back to the third level
6284 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 Back to the second level.
6289 \begin_layout Enumerate
6290 Back to the outermost level.
6293 \begin_layout Standard
6294 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6298 environment, see section
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6305 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6310 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6314 \begin_layout Standard
6315 There is more to nesting
6319 environments than we've stated here.
6320 You should read section
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6327 reference "sec:Nesting"
6331 to learn more about nesting.
6334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6336 \begin_inset Index idx
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6348 \begin_layout Standard
6349 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6353 list has no fixed label.
6354 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6363 of the first line as the label.
6367 \begin_layout Description
6368 Example: This is an example of the
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6377 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6381 \begin_layout Standard
6383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6390 it is meant that the first usage of the
6394 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6396 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6404 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6410 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6412 \begin_inset space ~
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6424 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6428 for more information.) Here is an example:
6431 \begin_layout Description
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6436 Example: This one shows how to use a
6439 \begin_inset space ~
6451 \begin_layout Description
6452 Usage: You should use the
6456 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6457 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6459 It's not a good idea to use a
6463 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6464 You're better off using
6476 paragraphs into them.
6479 \begin_layout Description
6480 Nesting: You can nest
6484 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6490 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6491 them from the first line.
6494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6496 \begin_inset Index idx
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6514 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6527 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6529 Here are its properties:
6532 \begin_layout Labeling
6533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6538 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6547 of each line as the item label.
6552 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6553 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6554 space as described above.
6557 \begin_layout Labeling
6558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6559 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6560 uses different margins for the item label and the
6561 body of the item text.
6562 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6563 label width plus a little extra space.
6567 \begin_layout Labeling
6568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6570 \begin_inset space ~
6573 width \SpecialChar LyX
6574 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6575 If the label width is larger, the label
6576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6583 into the first line.
6584 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6585 margin of the rest of the item text.
6588 \begin_layout Labeling
6589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6594 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6599 environment has the same left margin.
6600 \begin_inset Newline newline
6603 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6608 \begin_inset space ~
6613 dialog (toolbar button
6616 arg "layout-paragraph"
6623 \begin_inset space ~
6628 determines the default label width.
6629 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6638 multiple times instead.
6639 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6649 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6652 \begin_inset space ~
6657 every time you alter a label in a
6662 \begin_inset Newline newline
6665 The predefined default width is the length of
6666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6674 \begin_inset space ~
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6685 list the same way as the
6689 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6695 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6704 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6705 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6707 \begin_inset space ~
6711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6713 reference "sec:Nesting"
6717 to learn about nesting.
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6721 There is yet another feature of the
6725 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6726 left-justifies the item labels by
6728 You can use additional
6732 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6733 justifies the item label.
6738 are documented in section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6750 Here are some examples:
6753 \begin_layout Labeling
6754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6755 Left The default for
6762 \begin_layout Labeling
6763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6771 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6774 \begin_layout Labeling
6775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6776 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6780 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6787 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6790 \begin_layout Subsection
6792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6794 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 The features described in this section require that the module
6814 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6816 is loaded in the document settings.
6817 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6823 \begin_inset Index idx
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6837 Custom Enumerate Lists
6838 \begin_inset Index idx
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6850 \begin_layout Standard
6852 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6858 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6859 There you add the command
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6884 Code, look at section
6885 \begin_inset space ~
6889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6891 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6904 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6911 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6912 For capital Roman numerals replace
6924 in the command above.
6925 For Arabic numerals use
6933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6940 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 You can only number 26
6966 \begin_inset space ~
6969 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6979 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6983 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6986 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Enumerate
7017 \begin_inset Argument 1
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7043 \begin_layout Enumerate
7048 \begin_layout Enumerate
7049 \begin_inset Argument 1
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_layout Enumerate
7077 \begin_inset Argument 1
7080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 For this list these commands were used:
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7121 \begin_inset Newline newline
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 \begin_inset Newline newline
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7154 makes the label emphasized and
7163 \begin_layout Standard
7164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7173 lists until you change the definition.
7181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 \begin_inset Index idx
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7187 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7199 \begin_layout Enumerate
7200 \begin_inset Argument 1
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_inset Note Note
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 goes back to default numbering
7234 \begin_layout Enumerate
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7242 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7252 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7253 to indicate that it is a resumed
7254 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7255 , but in the output.
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7277 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7279 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7280 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7281 of a normal enumeration.
7282 There, insert the command
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7296 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7300 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7309 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7313 \begin_inset Argument 1
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 This enumeration starts at 4
7335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7337 \begin_inset Index idx
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7352 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7355 \begin_layout Itemize
7359 \begin_layout Itemize
7360 with standard spacing
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7366 Add there the command
7370 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7373 \begin_layout Itemize
7374 \begin_inset Argument 1
7377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Itemize
7400 \begin_layout Itemize
7404 \begin_layout Standard
7405 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7412 \begin_inset Index idx
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7423 For more information see its documentation,
7424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7437 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7438 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7442 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7445 \begin_layout Enumerate
7446 \begin_inset Argument 1
7449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7457 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7470 \begin_layout Enumerate
7471 with negative indentation
7474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 Further Customization
7476 \begin_inset Index idx
7479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7480 Lists ! Customization
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7489 You can also change the style of description lists.
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7499 \begin_layout Standard
7500 changes the description label font, the command
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 sets the list style.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 An example where the command
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 itshape, style=nextline
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_layout Description
7531 \begin_inset space ~
7535 \begin_inset Argument 1
7538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7546 itshape, style=nextline
7556 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7557 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7561 \begin_layout Description
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7566 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7567 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7568 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7578 \begin_inset Index idx
7581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 For more information see its documentation
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7600 \begin_layout Subsection
7602 \begin_inset Index idx
7605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7616 \begin_inset space ~
7619 Address: An Overview
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7624 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7632 \begin_inset space ~
7638 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7639 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7640 gags on the document.
7641 In contrast, you can use the
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7653 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7654 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7659 Of course, you're not limited to using
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7681 some European academic papers.
7684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7688 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7695 \begin_layout Standard
7700 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7701 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7705 \begin_inset space ~
7710 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7711 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7712 Here's an example of each:
7715 \begin_layout Right Address
7717 \begin_inset Newline newline
7721 \begin_inset Newline newline
7725 \begin_inset Newline newline
7728 When is it? What is today?
7731 \begin_layout Standard
7735 \begin_inset space ~
7741 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7743 the largest block of text on a single line.
7744 Here's an example of the
7751 \begin_layout Address
7753 \begin_inset Newline newline
7756 Where do I send this
7757 \begin_inset Newline newline
7760 Your post office and country
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 As you can see, both
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7776 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7781 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7782 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7788 This makes sense, since
7796 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7797 Thus, you have to use
7804 arg "newline-insert newline"
7809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7810 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7812 \begin_inset space ~
7816 \begin_inset space ~
7821 ) to start a new line in an
7828 \begin_inset space ~
7836 \begin_layout Subsection
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7842 or list of references.
7844 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7849 \begin_inset Index idx
7852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7861 \begin_layout Standard
7866 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7867 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7868 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7869 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7883 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7884 The book document classes ignores the
7888 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7892 in a letter document class.
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment does several things for you.
7901 First, it puts the centered label
7902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7910 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7912 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7913 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7914 the subsequent text.
7915 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7917 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7921 \begin_layout Standard
7922 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7926 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7927 The new paragraph will still be in the
7932 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7933 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7936 \begin_layout Standard
7937 \begin_inset Float figure
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7946 \begin_inset Graphics
7947 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7955 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7960 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7982 We would love to demonstrate the
7986 environment, but since this document is in the
7987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7994 class, we can't do this.
7995 We inserted it therefore as figure
7996 \begin_inset space ~
8000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8002 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8007 If you have never heard of an
8008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8015 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8020 \begin_inset Index idx
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8032 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8039 \begin_layout Standard
8044 environment is used to list references.
8045 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8046 only use it at the end of the document.
8058 \begin_layout Standard
8059 When you first open a
8063 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8064 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8080 depending on the document class.
8081 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8082 Each paragraph of the
8086 environment is a bibliography entry.
8091 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8092 Each new paragraph is still in the
8099 \begin_layout Standard
8100 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8101 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8103 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8105 handling, have a look at section
8106 \begin_inset space ~
8110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8112 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8119 \begin_layout Subsection
8120 Special Environments
8123 \begin_layout Standard
8125 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8126 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8134 \begin_inset Index idx
8137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8147 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8160 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8162 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8167 key as a fixed whitespace.
8171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 \begin_inset space ~
8189 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8207 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8210 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8213 arg "newline-insert newline"
8230 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8231 So, when you finish using the
8236 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8237 Also, you can nest the
8242 environment inside of others.
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8253 arg "newline-insert newline"
8256 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8261 \begin_inset space \space{}
8271 arg "newline-insert newline"
8277 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 arg "newline-insert newline"
8291 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8299 You must put at least one
8303 in any line you want blank.
8304 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8313 since that will insert
8318 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8321 arg "self-insert \""
8327 \begin_layout Standard
8331 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8335 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8339 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8343 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8348 printf("Hello World!
8353 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8357 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8362 This is just the standard
8363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8374 \begin_layout Standard
8380 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8382 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8383 as if you used a typewriter.
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Paragraph environments|)
8393 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8396 Program Code Listings
8401 \begin_inset space ~
8409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8413 \begin_inset Index idx
8416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8430 environment is similar to the
8435 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8436 computer console text.
8441 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8455 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8456 you can have empty lines.
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 have a certain language and a text style
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8475 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8476 and \SpecialChar TeX
8480 \begin_layout Standard
8481 Because of these properties
8485 works like a typewriter.
8489 \begin_layout Verbatim
8493 \begin_layout Verbatim
8496 The following 2 lines are empty:
8499 \begin_layout Verbatim
8503 \begin_layout Verbatim
8507 \begin_layout Verbatim
8508 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8518 environment is identical to
8522 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8530 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8534 \begin_layout Section
8535 Nesting Environments
8536 \begin_inset Index idx
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8540 Nesting ! Environments
8546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8555 \begin_layout Subsection
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8561 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8563 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8565 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8567 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8579 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 \begin_layout Enumerate
8588 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8597 \begin_layout Enumerate
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8602 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8603 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8619 \begin_inset space ~
8623 \begin_inset space ~
8628 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8630 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8633 arg "depth-increment"
8639 arg "depth-decrement"
8653 arg "depth-increment"
8659 arg "depth-decrement"
8663 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8664 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8668 \begin_layout Standard
8669 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8670 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8671 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8672 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8673 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8677 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8679 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8681 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8684 \begin_layout Subsection
8685 What You Can and Can't Nest
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8690 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8695 than a simple yes or no.
8696 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 Completely unnestable
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8714 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8715 environments have them:
8718 \begin_layout Description
8719 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8720 Can't nest into them.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Description
8757 \begin_inset space ~
8760 Nestable You can nest them.
8761 You can nest other things into them.
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 \begin_layout Itemize
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8801 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Description
8828 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8829 You can't nest anything into them.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8857 \begin_layout Itemize
8863 \begin_layout Itemize
8869 \begin_layout Itemize
8875 \begin_layout Itemize
8881 \begin_layout Itemize
8887 \begin_layout Itemize
8893 \begin_layout Itemize
8899 \begin_layout Itemize
8905 \begin_layout Itemize
8911 \begin_layout Itemize
8915 \begin_inset space ~
8921 \begin_layout Itemize
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8947 \begin_inset space ~
8950 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8951 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8952 nested section headings violate this.
8960 \begin_layout Subsection
8961 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8962 \begin_inset Index idx
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8966 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8976 affected by nesting anyhow.
8980 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 Figures and tables in
9006 are not affected by this.
9011 Have a look at section
9012 \begin_inset space ~
9016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9018 reference "sec:Floats"
9022 for more information about
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9031 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9032 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 of its own, it behaves just like a
9046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9053 paragraph environment.
9054 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9059 Here's an example with a table:
9062 \begin_layout Enumerate
9067 \begin_layout Enumerate
9068 This is (a) and it's nested.
9072 \begin_layout Standard
9073 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9081 \begin_inset Tabular
9082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9177 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9191 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9197 This is (a) and it's nested.
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9210 \begin_inset Tabular
9211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9319 \begin_layout Standard
9320 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9328 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9438 \begin_layout Standard
9439 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9454 \begin_layout Enumerate
9458 \begin_layout Standard
9459 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9465 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9466 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9470 \begin_layout Subsection
9471 Usage and General Features
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9475 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9476 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9485 is the innermost possible depth.
9486 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9489 \begin_layout Enumerate
9490 level #1 – outermost
9494 \begin_layout Enumerate
9499 \begin_layout Enumerate
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 \begin_layout Itemize
9514 \begin_layout Itemize
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9524 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9525 both of them in the example.
9526 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9536 For example, if we tried to nest another
9541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9548 , we would get errors.
9551 \begin_layout Subsection
9553 \begin_inset Index idx
9556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9565 \begin_layout Standard
9566 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9567 We have several examples of nested environments.
9568 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9573 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #2-a This is level #2.
9590 We created it by using
9593 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9599 arg "depth-increment"
9606 \begin_layout Labeling
9607 \labelwidthstring MMM
9608 #3-a This is level #3.
9609 This time, we just enter
9616 arg "depth-increment"
9620 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-increment"
9637 \begin_layout Standard
9642 environment, nested inside of
9643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9651 So, it's at level #4.
9652 We did this by entering
9655 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9661 arg "depth-increment"
9664 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9669 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9685 \begin_layout Standard
9690 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9693 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9699 \begin_layout Labeling
9700 \labelwidthstring MMM
9701 #4-a This is level #4.
9705 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9708 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9713 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9717 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9722 keep nesting things inside
9723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9734 \begin_layout Labeling
9735 \labelwidthstring MMM
9736 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9741 \begin_layout Labeling
9742 \labelwidthstring MMM
9743 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9744 and this is level #6.
9745 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9749 \begin_layout Labeling
9750 \labelwidthstring MMM
9751 #5-b Back to level #5.
9755 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9768 \begin_layout Labeling
9769 \labelwidthstring MMM
9773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9779 arg "depth-decrement"
9782 , we're back at level #4.
9786 \begin_layout Labeling
9787 \labelwidthstring MMM
9788 #3-b Back to level #3.
9789 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9793 \begin_layout Labeling
9794 \labelwidthstring MMM
9795 #2-b Back to level #2.
9800 \begin_layout Labeling
9801 \labelwidthstring MMM
9802 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9803 After this sentence, we will enter
9807 and change the paragraph environment back to
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 We could have also used the
9831 environment in place of the
9836 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9840 Example 2: Inheritance
9843 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9844 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9847 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9856 arg "depth-increment"
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
9863 which, we will change to the
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9876 environment, at level #2.
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 Notice how the nested
9884 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9888 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9893 We ended this example by entering
9898 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9902 and reset the nesting depth by using
9905 arg "depth-decrement"
9911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9912 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9921 \begin_inset Argument 1
9924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9925 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 This is level #1, in an
9938 paragraph environment.
9939 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 arg "depth-increment"
9958 Now, what happens if we nest an
9962 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9963 label be? An asterisk?
9967 \begin_layout Itemize
9977 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9978 So, its label is a bullet.
9979 (We got here by using
9982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9988 arg "depth-increment"
9991 , then changing the environment to
9999 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 Here's level #4, produced using
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-increment"
10013 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10018 \begin_layout Enumerate
10020 to get to level #5.
10021 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10026 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10030 , because we are in the
10038 environment (that is, it is an
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10059 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10064 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10067 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10070 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10077 arg "depth-decrement"
10080 to decrease the depth after the next
10083 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10097 \begin_layout Enumerate
10099 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10100 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10104 \begin_layout Enumerate
10105 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10114 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10119 reset the counter for the label.
10123 \begin_layout Enumerate
10127 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10133 arg "depth-decrement"
10136 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10137 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10138 into the twofold-nested
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 The same thing happens if we do another
10150 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10156 arg "depth-decrement"
10159 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10163 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10168 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10179 The number of other
10183 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10190 The same rule applies for the
10194 environment, as well.
10197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10198 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10201 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10203 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10204 the same detail with how we did it.
10213 \begin_layout Standard
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10228 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10229 the example in parentheses someplace.
10230 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10231 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10232 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10236 \begin_layout Enumerate
10241 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10246 Now we will add verse.
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10250 It will get much worse.
10251 \begin_inset Newline newline
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10271 \begin_layout Verse
10272 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10277 \begin_inset Newline newline
10283 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10291 \begin_layout Verse
10292 Here comes a table:
10296 \begin_layout Standard
10297 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10303 \begin_layout Standard
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10394 \begin_layout Verse
10398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10414 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 arg "depth-decrement"
10435 \begin_layout Enumerate
10440 : level #1) This is another item.
10441 Note that selecting a
10445 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10446 3 times to put the table inside the
10454 \begin_layout Quotation
10455 We're now ending the
10459 list and changing to
10464 We're still at level #1.
10465 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10466 The next set of paragraphs is a
10467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 We will nest both the
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10486 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10490 for the letter body.
10494 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10497 to preserve the depth.
10498 Remember that you need to use
10501 arg "newline-insert newline"
10504 to create multiple lines inside the
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_layout Right Address
10523 \begin_inset Newline newline
10526 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10533 \begin_layout Address
10535 \begin_inset space ~
10541 \begin_layout Quotation
10542 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10546 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10547 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10548 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10549 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10550 as soon as possible.
10551 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10554 \begin_layout Quotation
10555 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10556 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10557 with your order, along with payment.
10560 \begin_layout Quotation
10561 We thank you again for your patience.
10564 \begin_layout Address
10566 \begin_inset Newline newline
10573 \begin_layout Quotation
10574 That ends that example!
10577 \begin_layout Standard
10578 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10579 gives you a lot of power with just
10581 We could have easily nested an
10602 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10605 \begin_layout Subsection
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10611 Nesting ! Separation
10617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10619 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10627 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10629 For example you need two different enumerations:
10632 \begin_layout Enumerate
10637 \begin_layout Enumerate
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10647 \begin_inset Separator plain
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10666 \begin_layout Enumerate
10670 \begin_layout Enumerate
10674 \begin_layout Enumerate
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10680 list item and use the menu
10682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10683 Separated <Name> Above
10687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 Separated <Name> Below
10691 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10692 ) and before or behind it the
10694 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10697 \begin_layout Standard
10698 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10699 (red arrow in LyX).
10700 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10701 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10708 arg "paragraph-break"
10715 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10718 \begin_layout Section
10719 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10720 \begin_inset Index idx
10723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10732 \begin_layout Standard
10733 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10734 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10736 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10737 be broken at the end of a line.
10738 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10742 \begin_layout Subsection
10744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10746 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10751 \begin_inset Index idx
10754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10763 \begin_layout Standard
10764 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10765 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10766 ) not to break the line at
10768 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10771 \begin_layout Quote
10772 Further documentation is given in section
10773 \begin_inset Newline newline
10777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10779 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10787 \begin_layout Standard
10788 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10803 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 A protected space is set with
10814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10815 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 \begin_inset space ~
10825 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10831 \begin_layout Subsection
10833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10835 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10840 \begin_inset Index idx
10843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 Spacing ! Horizontal
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10856 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 The length units are listed in Appendix
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10867 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10878 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10883 \begin_inset Index idx
10886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 Spaces ! Inter-word
10895 \begin_layout Standard
10896 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10897 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10898 at the ends of sentences.
10899 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10900 automatically takes care about this.
10901 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10902 followed by a period; see section
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10914 To insert a normal space, select
10916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10917 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10927 arg "space-insert normal"
10933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10937 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10942 \begin_inset Index idx
10945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10963 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10972 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10973 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10974 inside abbreviations:
10977 \begin_layout Quote
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10986 \begin_layout Standard
10987 or between values and units.
10988 Compare for example this:
10989 \begin_inset Newline newline
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Newline newline
11000 10 kg (normal space
11003 \begin_layout Standard
11004 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11017 arg "space-insert thin"
11023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11027 \begin_layout Standard
11028 You can also insert the following space types:
11031 \begin_layout Description
11033 \begin_inset space ~
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11040 space A line with a
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11052 negative thin space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11064 space A line with a
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11069 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11073 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11076 negative medium space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Description
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11088 space A line with a
11089 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11093 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11097 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11100 negative thick space between the arrows.
11103 \begin_layout Description
11105 \begin_inset space ~
11109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11113 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11117 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11121 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11125 \begin_inset space ~
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11132 em) space between the arrows.
11135 \begin_layout Description
11137 \begin_inset space ~
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11145 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11149 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11153 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11157 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11164 em) space between the arrows.
11167 \begin_layout Description
11169 \begin_inset space ~
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11177 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11181 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11185 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11189 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 em) space between the arrows.
11199 \begin_layout Description
11201 \begin_inset space ~
11205 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11209 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 cm space between the arrows.
11224 \begin_layout Standard
11226 \begin_inset space ~
11230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11232 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11236 lists the different space sizes.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 \begin_inset Float table
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11253 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11257 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset Tabular
11268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11387 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11546 \begin_inset Index idx
11549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11560 feature for adding extra space
11561 in a uniform fashion.
11562 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11563 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11564 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11565 equally between themselves.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11572 \begin_layout Quote
11574 This is on the left side
11575 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11578 This is on the right
11581 \begin_layout Quote
11584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11588 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11594 \begin_layout Quote
11597 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 That was an example in the
11618 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11626 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11629 is one in a standard paragraph.
11630 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11634 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11646 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11651 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_layout Standard
11675 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11679 \begin_inset space ~
11685 \begin_layout Standard
11687 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_layout Standard
11711 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11734 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11736 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11737 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11741 option in the space dialog.
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11772 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11779 What is correct English?:
11780 \begin_inset Newline newline
11784 \begin_inset Newline newline
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11791 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11792 \begin_inset Newline newline
11796 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 \begin_inset Newline newline
11811 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11822 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11830 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11847 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11854 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11860 \begin_inset space ~
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11871 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11880 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11881 That is why it is named
11882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11890 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11891 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11895 \begin_layout Subsection
11897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11899 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11904 \begin_inset Index idx
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 \begin_layout Standard
11917 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11920 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11922 \begin_inset space ~
11928 There you find the following sizes:
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11944 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11945 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11950 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11961 \begin_inset Index idx
11964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11965 Document ! Settings
11970 for the paragraph separation.
11971 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11988 \begin_inset Index idx
11991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11997 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11998 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12003 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12004 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12013 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 s are described in section
12023 \begin_inset space ~
12027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12029 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12038 If there are several
12042 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12043 You can therefore use
12047 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12055 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12056 \begin_inset space ~
12060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12062 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12080 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12081 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12093 \begin_layout Subsection
12094 Paragraph Alignment
12095 \begin_inset Index idx
12098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 Paragraph ! Alignment
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12110 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 dialog (toolbar button
12116 arg "layout-paragraph"
12120 There are five possibilities:
12123 \begin_layout Itemize
12131 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12137 \begin_layout Itemize
12145 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12151 \begin_layout Itemize
12159 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12165 \begin_layout Itemize
12173 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12179 \begin_layout Itemize
12187 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12195 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12196 the left and right margins.
12197 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12202 This paragraph is right aligned,
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 this one is centered,
12210 \begin_layout Standard
12212 this one is left aligned.
12215 \begin_layout Subsection
12217 \begin_inset Index idx
12220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12221 Page breaks ! Forced
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12229 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12238 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12239 force a page break where you want one.
12240 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12241 is good at page breaking.
12242 Only if you use a lot of
12246 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12247 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12251 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12252 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12256 have to change the page breaking.
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12262 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12273 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12283 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12285 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12286 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12289 \begin_layout Standard
12290 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12291 at the top of a page.
12292 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12294 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12295 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12296 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12304 to learn more about
12311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12315 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12320 \begin_inset Index idx
12323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12324 Page breaks ! Clear
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12333 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12334 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12335 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12336 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12337 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12340 \begin_layout Standard
12341 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12352 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_inset space ~
12366 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12367 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12370 \begin_layout Subsection
12372 \begin_inset Index idx
12375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12384 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12391 \begin_layout Standard
12392 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12394 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12397 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12411 arg "newline-insert newline"
12415 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12432 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12435 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12437 This is useful to avoid
12438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12445 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12448 \begin_layout Standard
12449 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 very good at line breaking.
12453 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12454 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12455 \begin_inset space ~
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12461 reference "sec:Quote"
12466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12468 reference "sec:Verse"
12473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12475 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12482 \begin_layout Subsection
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12486 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12516 \begin_layout Standard
12520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12528 you can insert horizontal lines.
12529 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12530 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12531 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12534 \begin_layout Standard
12536 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12547 \begin_layout Section
12548 Characters and Symbols
12551 \begin_layout Standard
12552 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12553 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12554 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12562 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12566 for information on how this is done.
12569 \begin_layout Standard
12570 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12575 dialog via the menu
12577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12593 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12594 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12596 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12604 \begin_layout Section
12605 Fonts and Text Styles
12606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12608 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12615 \begin_layout Subsection
12617 \begin_inset Index idx
12620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12630 There are two types of fonts:
12633 \begin_layout Description
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_inset Index idx
12642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12648 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12653 characters) in the font.
12654 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12655 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12656 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12657 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12658 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12659 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12660 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12661 \begin_inset Newline newline
12664 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12665 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12666 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12667 sizes than at small ones.
12668 \begin_inset Newline newline
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12690 \begin_layout Description
12692 \begin_inset space ~
12696 \begin_inset Index idx
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12705 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12706 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12707 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12708 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12709 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12710 image manipulation program.
12711 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12712 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12716 pixels high up to 34
12717 \begin_inset space ~
12720 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12721 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12722 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12724 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12725 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12726 \begin_inset Newline newline
12729 Bitmap fonts are named
12732 \begin_inset space ~
12737 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12741 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12742 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12743 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12744 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12745 use scalable fonts.
12748 \begin_layout Standard
12749 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12753 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12757 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12760 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12761 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12762 font to emphasize text, you use an
12763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12771 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12773 In \SpecialChar LyX
12774 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12778 \begin_layout Subsection
12781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12783 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12791 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 used its own fonts.
12793 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12794 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12798 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12799 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12800 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12801 to a word processor.
12802 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12803 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12804 files are very portable across
12805 different machines.
12806 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12807 has increased a lot
12808 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12811 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12819 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12824 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12825 code in the document
12826 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12829 \begin_layout Standard
12830 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12831 engines that are also able directly
12832 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12834 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12836 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12838 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12839 that is installed on your system.
12840 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12843 \begin_layout Standard
12844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12852 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12853 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12861 \begin_layout Subsection
12862 Document Font and Font size
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12870 \begin_inset Index idx
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \begin_inset Index idx
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12893 You can set the document fonts in the
12895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12899 \begin_inset Index idx
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12903 Document ! Settings
12913 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12914 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12926 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12931 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12934 \begin_layout Standard
12939 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12940 This requires that you use
12952 as the output format, i.
12953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12957 \begin_inset space \space{}
12960 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12961 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12962 installed (see section
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12969 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12974 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12976 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12977 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12982 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12983 cannot determine the family.
12984 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12985 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12988 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12991 \begin_layout Standard
12992 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12993 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12998 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13004 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13006 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13008 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13011 font encoding, this is
13012 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13013 , depending on the document language,
13016 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13017 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset space ~
13031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13041 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13042 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13064 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13085 European Computer Modern
13088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13104 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13105 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13110 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13113 \begin_inset space ~
13118 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13124 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13125 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13137 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13155 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13156 community in order to replace
13160 as the default font.
13161 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13162 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13179 One difference is improved kerning.
13187 \begin_layout Itemize
13188 If you do not like the look of
13196 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13217 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13221 serif and typewriter fonts,
13225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13226 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13242 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13247 \begin_inset space \space{}
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13259 \begin_inset space \space{}
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13273 \begin_inset space ~
13283 but you can also select your own.
13284 \begin_inset Newline newline
13287 The differences between roman,
13290 \begin_inset space ~
13299 fonts are explained in section
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13306 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13311 \begin_inset Newline newline
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13322 was originally designed for newspapers.
13323 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13324 into the small newspaper columns.
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13350 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13355 depends on the class you are using.
13356 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13360 Note that the font size is the
13365 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13366 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13367 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13368 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13377 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13391 \begin_layout Standard
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13400 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13402 \begin_inset space ~
13405 serif or typewriter.
13410 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13420 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13428 LaTeX font encoding
13430 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13431 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13437 \begin_inset Index idx
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13463 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13464 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13465 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13469 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13480 Use Old Style Figures
13484 Use True Small Caps
13487 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13490 Use Old Style Figures
13492 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13494 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13502 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13506 Use True Small Caps
13508 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13509 of scaled capitals.
13510 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13511 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13512 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13519 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13520 provided by the font package (or the
13524 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13529 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13535 \begin_layout Standard
13540 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13541 a font to display the script characters.
13545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13546 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 So this has no effect for the document language
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13581 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13583 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13584 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13590 \begin_inset Index idx
13593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13595 packages ! microtype
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13607 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13609 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13614 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13621 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13628 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13651 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13656 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13657 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13659 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13664 dialog, see section
13665 \begin_inset space ~
13669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13671 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13683 \begin_layout Subsection
13687 \begin_layout Standard
13688 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13689 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13691 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13692 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13693 choose a math font in the dialog
13695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13699 \begin_inset Index idx
13702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 Document ! Settings
13709 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13710 automatically selects a math font.
13711 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13712 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13721 \begin_inset space ~
13727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13732 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13733 document font is available.
13736 \begin_layout Standard
13737 Note that the math font will not be used for
13741 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13747 or by the insertion of the command
13754 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13755 \begin_inset space ~
13759 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13760 while the math characters do not.
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13765 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13781 in the document font settings.
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13786 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13787 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13788 font (in most cases
13789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13795 \begin_inset space ~
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13804 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13805 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13825 \begin_layout Subsection
13827 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13837 name "subsec:charstyles"
13844 \begin_inset Index idx
13847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_inset Index idx
13857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13866 \begin_layout Standard
13867 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13868 automatically changes the
13869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13872 style for certain paragraph environments.
13874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13875 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13877 This is where we meet the concept of
13883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13920 e., available with all document classes.
13921 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13925 for specific purposes.
13926 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13929 \begin_layout Standard
13931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13932 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13942 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13946 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13959 — you customized the
13964 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13965 among them, encourage the use of
13977 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13984 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13989 Rather than fiddling with
13993 , they encourage the use of
13997 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14002 \begin_inset Quotes els
14006 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14009 ), not their form (
14010 \begin_inset Quotes els
14014 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14018 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14019 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14020 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14021 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14022 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14023 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14029 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14033 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14034 With a semantic markup (such as
14038 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14043 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14045 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14046 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14052 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14053 by \SpecialChar LyX
14059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14062 Builtin Text Styles
14063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14065 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14072 \begin_layout Standard
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14075 The two builtin text styles can be
14076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14085 both of these styles
14088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14107 style, do one of the following:
14110 \begin_layout Itemize
14111 click on the toolbar button
14120 \begin_layout Itemize
14121 use the key binding
14128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14132 \begin_layout Itemize
14134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14142 arg "dialog-show character"
14148 arg "dialog-show character"
14151 ) as described in section
14152 \begin_inset space ~
14156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14158 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14167 \begin_layout Standard
14168 These commands are all toggles.
14173 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 One typically uses the
14181 style for proper names.
14183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14190 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14207 is producing text in
14211 , but the definition can be changed.
14216 \begin_layout Standard
14218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14228 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14235 \begin_layout Itemize
14236 clicking on the toolbar button
14245 \begin_layout Itemize
14246 using the keybindings
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14257 \begin_layout Itemize
14259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14267 arg "dialog-show character"
14273 arg "dialog-show character"
14276 ) as described in section
14277 \begin_inset space ~
14281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14283 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14292 \begin_layout Standard
14297 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14304 packages use a different font
14305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14306 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14312 \begin_layout Standard
14313 We've been using the
14317 style all over the place in this document.
14318 Here's one more example:
14321 \begin_layout Quotation
14325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14333 \begin_layout Standard
14334 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14335 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14336 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14337 the common tendency to overuse
14338 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14352 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14353 only as font changes and integrated in the
14361 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14364 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14371 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14377 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14385 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14393 arg "dialog-show character"
14399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14407 arg "dialog-show character"
14411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14421 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14428 \begin_layout Standard
14430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14431 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14439 reference "subsec:Modules"
14446 ), or local layout settings (see section
14447 \begin_inset space ~
14451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14453 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14458 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14462 markup for specific functions.
14463 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14468 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14478 \begin_inset Quotes els
14482 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14488 \begin_layout Standard
14490 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14491 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14499 \begin_layout Standard
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14502 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14507 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14508 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14509 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14514 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14515 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14528 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14529 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14530 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14531 \begin_inset Flex Code
14534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14545 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14559 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14573 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14574 on screen their formal appearance.
14579 \begin_layout Subsection
14581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14583 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14593 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14609 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14614 \begin_inset Index idx
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 \begin_layout Standard
14627 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14631 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14640 the properties of text passages
14641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14645 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14646 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14647 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14648 from ordinary dialog.
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14656 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14657 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14658 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14659 the properties of the respective text passages.
14664 comes in as a last resort.
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14670 Before we document how to
14671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14672 use custom character style
14673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14674 tweak the text properties
14676 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14686 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14687 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14690 \begin_layout Standard
14692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14693 use custom character styles
14694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14695 tweak text properties
14698 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14703 \begin_inset space ~
14706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14714 arg "dialog-show character"
14719 dialog or press the toolbar button
14722 arg "dialog-show character"
14727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14730 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14733 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14736 property that you can choose.
14737 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14740 \begin_inset space ~
14745 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14758 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14759 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14760 environments all at once.
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14770 properties, and their options (in addition to
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14791 \begin_layout Labeling
14792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 The possible options are:
14810 \begin_layout Labeling
14811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14816 This is the Roman font family.
14817 Normally a serif font.
14818 It's also the default family.
14828 \begin_layout Labeling
14829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14840 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14852 \begin_layout Labeling
14853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14860 This is the Typewriter font family.
14866 arg "font-typewriter"
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14876 \begin_layout Standard
14878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14879 The general differences of these families are:
14882 \begin_layout Itemize
14884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14889 fonts use characters with serifs.
14890 These are the small
14891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14898 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14899 The following example shows the difference:
14900 \begin_inset Newline newline
14904 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 text without serifs
14912 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14916 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14923 \begin_layout Itemize
14925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14930 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14931 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14932 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14935 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 \begin_inset Newline newline
14972 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14988 \begin_inset Note Note
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14994 For more on phantoms see section
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15001 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15011 \begin_inset Newline newline
15020 \begin_layout Labeling
15021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15026 This corresponds to the print weight.
15031 \begin_layout Labeling
15032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15037 This is the Medium font series.
15038 It's also the default series.
15041 \begin_layout Labeling
15042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15049 This is the Bold font series.
15062 \begin_layout Labeling
15063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15068 As the name implies.
15073 \begin_layout Labeling
15074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15079 This is the Upright font shape.
15080 It's also the default shape.
15083 \begin_layout Labeling
15084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15104 s the Italic font shape
15110 \begin_layout Labeling
15111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15118 This is the Slanted font shape
15120 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15121 , this is different from italic).
15124 \begin_layout Labeling
15125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15129 \begin_inset space ~
15136 This is the Small caps font shape
15143 \begin_layout Labeling
15144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15149 Alters the text color.
15150 Note that not all DVI
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15156 viewers are able to display colors.
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15164 \begin_inset space ~
15171 , which means that the document default color set in
15173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15272 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 \begin_layout Labeling
15285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15291 the language of the document.
15292 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15294 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15297 in blue to indicate the change
15298 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15299 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15303 \begin_inset Newline newline
15306 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15308 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15309 When using the spell checking (see section
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15316 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15320 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15323 \begin_inset Newline newline
15326 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15328 Exclude from Spellchecking
15331 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15334 \begin_layout Labeling
15335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15340 Alters the size of the font.
15342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15348 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15351 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15352 document font size.
15353 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15354 the details, but a general description of what
15360 \begin_layout Labeling
15361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15382 arg "font-size tiny"
15388 \begin_layout Labeling
15389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15410 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15416 \begin_layout Labeling
15417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15438 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 arg "font-size small"
15472 \begin_layout Labeling
15473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 It's also the default size.
15491 arg "font-size normal"
15497 \begin_layout Labeling
15498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15519 arg "font-size large"
15525 \begin_layout Labeling
15526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15547 arg "font-size larger"
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 arg "font-size largest"
15581 \begin_layout Labeling
15582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15603 arg "font-size huge"
15609 \begin_layout Labeling
15610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 arg "font-size giant"
15637 \begin_layout Labeling
15638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 arg "font-size increase"
15669 \begin_layout Labeling
15670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15675 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 arg "font-size decrease"
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15707 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15708 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15710 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15711 — use those instead.
15712 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15715 \begin_layout Labeling
15716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15729 change a few other things at the character level
15730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15731 have text passages being underlined
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15736 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15737 days, when you could not change fonts.
15738 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15739 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15740 because some people
15744 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15751 \begin_layout Labeling
15752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15761 This is text with emphasize on
15764 This might seem like the same as
15768 , but it is actually a bit different.
15774 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15776 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15781 \begin_layout Labeling
15782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15789 Don't use underlining.
15794 \begin_layout Labeling
15795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15820 arg "font-underline"
15826 \begin_inset Newline newline
15830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15833 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15834 when you could not change fonts.
15835 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15836 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15837 because some people
15841 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15846 \begin_layout Labeling
15847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15862 This is text with Double under
15863 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15874 arg "font-underunderline"
15878 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15880 \begin_inset Newline newline
15883 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15884 about double underbar
15889 \begin_layout Labeling
15890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15905 This is text with Wavy under
15906 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15917 arg "font-underwave"
15921 \begin_inset Newline newline
15924 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15925 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15931 \begin_layout Labeling
15932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15939 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15945 \begin_layout Labeling
15946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15953 Don't use strikethrough.
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15961 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15963 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15978 Single strikethrough
15986 arg "font-strikeout"
15990 \begin_inset Newline newline
15993 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15994 changed in the meantime.
15997 \begin_layout Labeling
15998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16004 \begin_inset space ~
16008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16010 \begin_inset space ~
16014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16022 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16030 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16040 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16041 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16042 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16048 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16055 \begin_layout Itemize
16057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16064 This is text with emphasize on
16069 \begin_layout Itemize
16073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16080 This is text with Noun on.
16082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16089 , this is a logical attribute.
16090 Normally it's equivalent to
16093 \begin_inset space ~
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16104 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16113 chosen a new character style
16114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16115 applied a text property
16118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16126 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16134 arg "dialog-show character"
16142 arg "dialog-show character"
16145 ) dialog, the settings are
16146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16150 You can activate the
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16154 last applied properties
16156 by using the toolbar button
16159 arg "textstyle-apply"
16163 The button lets you apply
16164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16165 your custom character style
16166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16169 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16171 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16172 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16173 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16174 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16180 To completely reset the
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16184 text properties of a selection
16186 to the default, use
16187 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16189 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16199 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16204 from the menu of the toolbar button
16207 arg "textstyle-apply"
16214 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16215 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16216 you just set the shape to
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_inset space ~
16249 \begin_layout Standard
16251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16252 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16260 \begin_inset space ~
16272 \begin_layout Itemize
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 \begin_inset Newline newline
16309 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16323 \begin_inset Note Note
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 For more on phantoms see section
16328 \begin_inset space ~
16332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16334 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16344 \begin_inset Newline newline
16350 \begin_layout Itemize
16352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16357 fonts use characters with serifs.
16358 These are the small
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16367 The following example shows the difference:
16368 \begin_inset Newline newline
16372 \begin_inset Newline newline
16377 text without serifs
16380 \begin_inset Newline newline
16383 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16384 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16391 \begin_layout Itemize
16393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16398 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16399 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16400 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16407 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16416 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16424 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16425 the property to be removed.
16426 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16427 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16428 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16446 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16447 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16459 \begin_inset space ~
16464 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 If you, for example, set
16476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16499 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16513 \begin_layout Standard
16515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16518 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16519 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16522 \begin_layout Section
16523 Printing and Previewing
16526 \begin_layout Subsection
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16532 using \SpecialChar LyX
16533 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16534 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16535 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16536 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16538 Additional Features
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16545 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16548 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16549 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16550 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16554 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16555 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16556 to turn your writing into printable output.
16557 This happens in two stages:
16560 \begin_layout Enumerate
16561 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16562 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16564 a file with the extension,
16565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16579 \begin_layout Enumerate
16580 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16581 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 to use the commands in the
16586 file to produce printable output.
16589 \begin_layout Subsection
16590 Output file formats
16591 \begin_inset Index idx
16594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16603 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16611 Simple text (ASCII)
16612 \begin_inset Index idx
16615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16616 File formats ! ASCII
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 This file type has the extension
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16638 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16642 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16653 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16661 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16662 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16663 bibliography (section
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16670 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16675 If your document includes such material, use
16677 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16678 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16680 \begin_inset space ~
16684 \begin_inset space ~
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16706 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16707 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16713 \begin_inset Index idx
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16717 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16726 \begin_layout Standard
16727 This file type has the extension
16728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16739 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16742 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 -Errors or to process it manually
16745 with console commands.
16746 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16748 's temporary directory whenever you
16749 view or export your document.
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16754 -file using the menu
16756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16757 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16762 export variants are explained in section
16763 \begin_inset space ~
16767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16769 reference "subsec:Export"
16776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16778 \begin_inset Index idx
16781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 This file type has the extension
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16813 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16814 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16818 \begin_layout Standard
16819 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16820 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16821 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16822 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16823 when you view the DVI.
16824 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16828 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16845 The latter option uses the program
16847 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16856 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16857 font access (see section
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16864 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16869 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16870 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 File formats ! PostScript
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 This file type has the extension
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 PostScript was developed by the company
16907 as a printer language.
16908 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16910 PostScript can be seen as a
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 programming language
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16923 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 packages ! pstricks
16945 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16948 \begin_layout Standard
16949 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16953 Encapsulated PostScript
16954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 (EPS, file extension
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16970 As \SpecialChar LyX
16971 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16972 convert them in the background to EPS.
16973 If, for example, you have 50
16974 \begin_inset space ~
16977 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16982 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16983 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16985 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16986 EPS to avoid this problem.
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16990 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16992 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16993 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17001 \begin_inset Index idx
17004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 \begin_inset Index idx
17014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 \begin_layout Standard
17024 This file type has the extension
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 Portable Document Format
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 was derived from PostScript.
17050 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17060 looks exactly the same.
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17064 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17068 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 (JPG, file extension
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17100 Portable Network Graphics
17101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17104 (PNG, file extension
17105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17118 converts them in the
17119 background to one of these formats.
17120 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17121 will slow down your workflow.
17122 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17125 \begin_layout Standard
17126 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17128 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17134 \begin_layout Description
17136 \begin_inset space ~
17139 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17143 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17146 \begin_layout Description
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17155 ) This uses the program
17157 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17160 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17163 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17166 is a new engine, derived from
17170 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17171 access (see section
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17178 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17183 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17184 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17189 \begin_layout Description
17191 \begin_inset space ~
17198 ) This uses the program
17203 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17209 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17210 font access (see section
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17217 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17222 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17223 vertically written Japanese.
17226 \begin_layout Description
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17231 (cropped) This is the same as
17234 \begin_inset space ~
17239 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17240 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17241 to generate good-looking
17242 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17245 \begin_layout Description
17247 \begin_inset space ~
17250 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17254 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17258 \begin_layout Description
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17263 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17267 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17268 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17272 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17273 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17276 \begin_layout Standard
17280 \begin_inset space ~
17289 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17290 works without problems.
17291 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17292 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17304 \begin_inset space ~
17309 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 FileFormats ! XHTML
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_layout Standard
17342 This file type has the extension
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17355 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17356 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17357 When \SpecialChar LyX
17358 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17359 suitable for the purpose.
17360 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 between different formats, which are described in section
17368 Math Output in XHTML
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17382 XHTML output remains
17383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17390 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17391 features are supported yet.
17395 and the World Wide Web
17399 Additional Features
17401 manual, for more information.
17404 \begin_layout Standard
17405 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17407 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17408 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17414 \begin_layout Subsection
17416 \begin_inset Index idx
17419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17429 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17430 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17439 or use the toolbar button
17446 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17447 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17448 \begin_inset space ~
17452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17454 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17458 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17466 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17471 Further output formats can be selected via
17473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17474 View (Other Formats)
17476 or the toolbar button
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17487 viewer window using the menu
17489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 Update (Other Formats)
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17501 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17504 To have a real output, export your document.
17507 \begin_layout Section
17508 A few Words about Typography
17509 \begin_inset Index idx
17512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 \begin_layout Subsection
17522 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17523 \begin_inset Index idx
17526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \begin_inset Index idx
17536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17545 \begin_layout Standard
17546 In \SpecialChar LyX
17548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 symbol comes in four variants: the
17576 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17583 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17593 height_special "totalheight"
17598 backgroundcolor "none"
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 \begin_inset Tabular
17603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17604 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17608 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17637 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17677 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 system key combination
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17717 and the em dash with
17720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17733 is the Mac label for the right
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17757 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 system key combination or
17781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17847 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17854 Dashes can also be inserted with
17856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17858 \begin_inset space ~
17861 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17869 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17870 and 2014 for the en dash).
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17874 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17875 mode and has a length of its own.
17876 Here are some examples:
17879 \begin_layout Enumerate
17880 line- and page-breaks
17881 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17891 \begin_layout Enumerate
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17907 \begin_layout Enumerate
17908 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17909 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17919 \begin_layout Enumerate
17920 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17924 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17938 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17939 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17947 \begin_layout Subsection
17948 Dashes and Line Breaks
17949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17951 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17960 case and locale, e.
17961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17967 \begin_layout Itemize
17968 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17969 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17972 \begin_layout Itemize
17973 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17977 \begin_layout Itemize
17978 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17979 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17983 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17984 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17995 allows line breaks after hyphens
17996 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17998 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18001 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18004 \begin_layout Enumerate
18005 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18009 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18011 The Elements of Typographic Style
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18017 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18020 \begin_layout Enumerate
18021 Unwanted line breaks
18026 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18028 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18031 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18038 Prevent Hyphenation
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18059 in \SpecialChar TeX
18061 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18062 , a protected space does not suffice
18066 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18074 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18075 in the document language.
18076 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18090 \begin_layout Itemize
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18106 height_special "totalheight"
18111 backgroundcolor "none"
18114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 \begin_layout Itemize
18125 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18135 height_special "totalheight"
18140 backgroundcolor "none"
18143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18145 \begin_inset space ~
18153 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18157 – sont très utiles.
18160 \begin_layout Itemize
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18179 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18183 – in contrast to an overfull line
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18187 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18191 \begin_layout Standard
18192 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18198 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18203 \begin_layout Enumerate
18204 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18205 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18206 or \SpecialChar TeX
18212 \begin_layout Itemize
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18217 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 – sont très utiles.
18225 \begin_layout Enumerate
18226 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18227 \begin_inset Newline newline
18232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18237 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18239 \begin_inset space ~
18245 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18247 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18260 \begin_layout Itemize
18261 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18262 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18263 should be followed by
18264 a line break opportunity.
18267 \begin_layout Standard
18268 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18275 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18286 \begin_layout Enumerate
18287 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18288 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18289 or en dashes (see section
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18296 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18307 Changes and backwards compatibility
18310 \begin_layout Standard
18311 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18316 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18317 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18326 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18327 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18335 \begin_layout Standard
18336 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18343 prevents ligation to dashes.
18345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18357 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18358 after the input (unless the current text font is
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18367 The behavior was changed since
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18383 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18384 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18385 as non-breakable dashes.
18386 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18395 \begin_layout Standard
18398 \begin_inset space ~
18406 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18408 \begin_inset space ~
18411 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18415 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18419 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18423 If you used both literal and
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18431 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18433 \begin_inset space ~
18436 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18437 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18440 \begin_layout Subsection
18442 \begin_inset Index idx
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18454 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18461 \begin_layout Standard
18462 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18463 but automatically in the output.
18464 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18470 \begin_inset Index idx
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18480 following the rules of the document language.
18482 does not hyphenate text in the
18486 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18489 \begin_layout Standard
18491 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18495 font and with unusual constructs, like
18496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18505 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18506 This is done with the menu
18508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18509 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18511 \begin_inset space ~
18517 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18519 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 \begin_layout Standard
18524 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18525 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18536 would then see the hyphen
18537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 as a line break possibility.
18545 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18546 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18550 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18553 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18555 Prevent Hyphenation
18560 \begin_inset space ~
18568 \begin_layout Subsection
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18583 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18586 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 When \SpecialChar LyX
18595 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18596 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18598 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 appropriate amount of space.
18605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18610 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18611 gets after another word.
18614 \begin_layout Standard
18615 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18616 not work in all cases.
18618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18629 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18630 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18634 Here are some examples of
18638 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18641 \begin_layout Itemize
18646 \begin_layout Itemize
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18655 \begin_layout Itemize
18657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18661 this is too much space!
18664 \begin_layout Itemize
18669 \begin_layout Standard
18670 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18674 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18677 \begin_layout Enumerate
18681 \begin_inset space ~
18686 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18693 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18698 \begin_inset Index idx
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18702 Spaces ! inter-word
18710 \begin_layout Enumerate
18714 \begin_inset space ~
18719 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18720 \begin_inset space ~
18724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18726 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18731 \begin_inset Index idx
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 \begin_layout Enumerate
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18764 \begin_inset space ~
18769 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18770 This function is also bound to
18773 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18779 \begin_layout Standard
18780 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18783 \begin_layout Itemize
18785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18789 \begin_inset space \space{}
18792 this is too much space!
18795 \begin_layout Itemize
18796 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18800 \begin_layout Standard
18801 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18802 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18804 will take care of this.
18807 \begin_layout Standard
18808 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18812 \begin_inset space ~
18818 feature described in the section
18820 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18825 Additional Features
18830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18832 \begin_inset Index idx
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 Typography ! Quotation marks
18842 \begin_inset Index idx
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18846 Quotation marks | see
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 \begin_layout Standard
18878 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18879 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18880 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18890 The keyboard character,
18894 , generates this automatically.
18897 \begin_layout Standard
18898 You can specify what character the
18902 key produces by using the submenu
18908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18912 \begin_inset Index idx
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 Document ! Settings
18921 dialog and switching the
18925 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18926 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18928 \begin_inset space ~
18934 \begin_layout Labeling
18935 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18947 \begin_inset space ~
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset Quotes els
18959 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18973 \begin_inset Quotes els
18977 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18980 quotation marks (as common, e.
18981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18987 \begin_layout Labeling
18988 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18991 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18995 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19011 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19017 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19025 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19029 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19032 quotation marks (as common, e.
19033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19039 \begin_layout Labeling
19040 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19043 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19063 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19069 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19077 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19081 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19084 quotation marks (as common, e.
19085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19103 \begin_inset space ~
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19111 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19115 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19121 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19125 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19129 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19133 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19136 quotation marks (as common, e.
19137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19143 \begin_layout Labeling
19144 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19147 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19151 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19155 \begin_inset space ~
19159 \begin_inset space ~
19163 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19167 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19173 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19177 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19181 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19185 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19188 quotation marks (as common, e.
19189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19192 g., in Switzerland)
19195 \begin_layout Labeling
19196 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19199 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19203 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset Quotes als
19219 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19225 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19229 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19233 \begin_inset Quotes als
19237 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19240 quotation marks (as common, e.
19241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19247 \begin_layout Labeling
19248 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19251 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19255 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19259 \begin_inset space ~
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19267 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19271 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19277 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19281 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19285 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19289 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19292 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19295 \begin_layout Labeling
19296 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19299 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19319 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19325 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19329 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19333 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19337 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19340 quotation marks (as common, e.
19341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19344 g., in Great Britain)
19347 \begin_layout Labeling
19348 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19351 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19355 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19359 \begin_inset space ~
19363 \begin_inset space ~
19367 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19371 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19377 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19381 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19385 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19389 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19392 quotation marks (as common, e.
19393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19399 \begin_layout Labeling
19400 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19403 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19407 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19411 \begin_inset space ~
19415 \begin_inset space ~
19419 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19423 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19429 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19433 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19437 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19441 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19444 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19450 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19451 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19452 the inner marks differ).
19460 \begin_layout Labeling
19461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19464 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19490 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19502 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19505 quotation marks (as common, e.
19506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19512 \begin_layout Labeling
19513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19516 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19536 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19542 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19546 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19550 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19554 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19557 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19560 \begin_layout Labeling
19561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19562 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19570 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19586 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19594 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19598 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19602 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19606 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19610 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19613 quotation marks (as common, e.
19614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19623 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19631 \begin_layout Labeling
19632 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19633 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19641 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19647 \begin_inset space ~
19651 \begin_inset space ~
19657 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19665 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19669 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19673 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19677 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19681 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19684 quotation marks (as common, e.
19685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19688 g., in North Korea and China)
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19694 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19702 \begin_layout Standard
19703 Inner quotation marks
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19709 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19710 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19718 does not necessarily mean
19719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19727 This is why we call them
19728 \begin_inset Quotes els
19732 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19748 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19750 \begin_inset Quotes els
19754 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19757 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19760 arg "quote-insert inner"
19765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19772 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19773 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19774 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19775 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19776 If you check the setting
19778 Use dynamic quotation marks
19782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19783 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19786 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19787 they appear in a special color).
19788 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19789 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19794 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19797 \begin_layout Standard
19798 Individual quotation marks (i.
19799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19802 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19803 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19807 \begin_layout Subsection
19809 \begin_inset Index idx
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 Typography ! Ligatures
19819 \begin_inset Index idx
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19853 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19860 \begin_layout Standard
19861 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19862 print them as single characters.
19863 These groups are known as
19868 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19869 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19871 Here are the standard ligatures:
19874 \begin_layout Itemize
19878 \begin_layout Itemize
19882 \begin_layout Itemize
19886 \begin_layout Itemize
19890 \begin_layout Itemize
19894 \begin_layout Standard
19895 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19899 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19900 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19908 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 To break a ligature, use
19926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19927 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19929 \begin_inset space ~
19936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19947 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19964 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19972 \begin_layout Subsection
19974 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19976 \begin_inset Index idx
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 \begin_layout Standard
19992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19993 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19997 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20000 \begin_layout Description
20002 The name of the game.
20005 \begin_layout Description
20007 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20011 \begin_layout Description
20013 The \SpecialChar TeX
20014 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20018 \begin_layout Description
20019 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20020 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20024 \begin_layout Standard
20025 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20031 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20039 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20040 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20041 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20042 converges to the number
20043 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20046 : The actual version is
20047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20055 , the previous one was
20056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20067 \begin_layout Subsection
20069 \begin_inset Index idx
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 \begin_layout Standard
20082 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20083 space between two words.
20084 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20094 for units use the menu
20096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20097 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20107 arg "space-insert thin"
20113 \begin_layout Standard
20114 Here is an example to show the differences:
20117 \begin_layout Standard
20118 \begin_inset Tabular
20119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20121 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20122 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 space between number and unit
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20161 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 half space between number and unit
20186 \begin_layout Subsection
20188 \begin_inset Index idx
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20200 \begin_layout Standard
20201 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20203 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20204 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20205 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20206 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20207 These bits of text became known as
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20220 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20221 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20222 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20223 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20224 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20225 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20226 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20227 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20228 \begin_inset Newline newline
20236 \begin_inset Newline newline
20244 \begin_inset Newline newline
20247 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20248 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20249 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20251 \begin_inset space ~
20255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20257 key "latexcompanion"
20263 \begin_inset space ~
20267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20274 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20275 's page break mechanism.
20278 \begin_layout Chapter
20279 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20282 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20289 \begin_layout Standard
20290 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20293 \begin_inset space ~
20299 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20302 \begin_layout Section
20304 \begin_inset Index idx
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20323 \begin_layout Standard
20325 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20328 \begin_layout Description
20331 \begin_inset space ~
20334 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20335 \begin_inset Newline newline
20339 \begin_inset Note Note
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20351 \begin_layout Description
20352 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20353 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20354 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20358 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20366 \begin_inset Newline newline
20370 \begin_inset Note Comment
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20383 \begin_layout Description
20385 \begin_inset space ~
20388 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20389 set in the document settings under
20391 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20393 \begin_inset space ~
20399 \begin_inset Newline newline
20403 \begin_inset Newline newline
20407 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20417 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20422 of a comment that appears in the output.
20428 \begin_inset Newline newline
20432 \begin_inset Newline newline
20435 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20438 \begin_layout Standard
20439 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20451 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20454 \begin_layout Section
20456 \begin_inset Index idx
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20468 name "sec:Footnotes"
20475 \begin_layout Standard
20477 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20483 or the toolbar button
20486 arg "footnote-insert"
20498 \begin_inset Graphics
20499 filename clipart/footnote.png
20508 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20509 's representation of your footnote.
20519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20538 label, the box will
20542 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20543 Clicking on the box label again will close
20556 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20557 and click on the footnote
20572 \begin_layout Standard
20573 Here is an example footnote:
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20590 \begin_layout Standard
20591 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20592 position where the footnote box is placed.
20593 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20594 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20595 according to the document class.
20597 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20598 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20604 ey are described in the
20607 \begin_inset space ~
20615 \begin_layout Section
20617 \begin_inset Index idx
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20629 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20636 \begin_layout Standard
20637 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20639 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20643 \begin_inset space ~
20648 or the toolbar button
20651 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20677 appearing within your text.
20678 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20679 's representation of your margin
20688 \begin_layout Standard
20689 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20693 \begin_inset Marginal
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 This is a marginal note.
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20708 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20709 pages, right on odd pages.
20712 \begin_layout Standard
20713 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20716 \begin_inset space ~
20724 \begin_inset space ~
20732 \begin_layout Section
20733 Graphics and Images
20734 \begin_inset Index idx
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 \begin_inset Index idx
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20756 name "sec:Graphics"
20763 \begin_layout Standard
20764 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20765 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20768 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20780 \begin_layout Standard
20781 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20786 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20787 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20789 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20790 \begin_inset space ~
20794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20796 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20803 \begin_layout Standard
20808 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20809 of the image in the output.
20810 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20818 \begin_inset space ~
20827 \begin_inset space ~
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20835 \begin_inset space ~
20840 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20841 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20849 \begin_layout Standard
20853 \begin_inset space ~
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20862 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20863 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20865 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20870 \begin_inset space ~
20875 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20876 with the image size is printed.
20879 \begin_layout Standard
20880 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20881 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20883 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20886 \begin_layout Standard
20888 \begin_inset Graphics
20889 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20897 \begin_layout Standard
20898 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20899 the image into a float, see section
20900 \begin_inset space ~
20904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20906 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20913 \begin_layout Subsection
20915 \begin_inset Index idx
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20927 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20934 \begin_layout Standard
20935 You can insert images in any known file format.
20936 But as we explained in section
20937 \begin_inset space ~
20941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20943 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20947 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20949 therefore uses the program
20953 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20954 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20955 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20956 \begin_inset space ~
20960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20962 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20969 \begin_layout Standard
20970 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20973 \begin_layout Description
20975 \begin_inset space ~
20978 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20979 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20980 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20984 Graphics Interchange Format
20985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20988 (GIF, file extension
20989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21001 \begin_inset Index idx
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21036 Portable Network Graphics
21037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21040 (PNG, file extension
21041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21053 \begin_inset Index idx
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21088 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21092 (JPG, file extension
21093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21117 \begin_inset Index idx
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Description
21153 \begin_inset space ~
21156 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21158 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21159 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21160 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21161 \begin_inset Newline newline
21164 Scalable image formats can be
21165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21168 Scalable Vector Graphics
21169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21172 (SVG, file extension
21173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21185 \begin_inset Index idx
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21220 Encapsulated PostScript
21221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21224 (EPS, file extension
21225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21237 \begin_inset Index idx
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21272 Portable Document Format
21273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21276 (PDF, file extension
21277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21289 \begin_inset Index idx
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21307 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21308 result will not be scalable.
21309 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21323 \begin_layout Standard
21324 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21331 \begin_layout Subsection
21332 Grouping of Image Settings
21333 \begin_inset Index idx
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 Images ! Settings grouping
21345 \begin_layout Standard
21346 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21348 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21349 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21351 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21352 need to manually change each of them.
21356 \begin_layout Standard
21357 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21360 \begin_inset space ~
21364 \begin_inset space ~
21376 \begin_inset space ~
21380 \begin_inset space ~
21386 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21387 and checking the name of the desired group.
21390 \begin_layout Section
21392 \begin_inset Index idx
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21411 \begin_layout Standard
21412 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21415 arg "tabular-insert"
21420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21424 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21425 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21426 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21429 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21430 from the rest of the table.
21431 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21432 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21434 Here is an example table:
21437 \begin_layout Standard
21439 \begin_inset Tabular
21440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21441 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21647 \begin_layout Standard
21649 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21650 This corresponds to the
21651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21658 table style listed in the style selection.
21661 \begin_layout Standard
21663 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21664 Other available styles include:
21667 \begin_layout Itemize
21669 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21678 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21682 \begin_layout Itemize
21684 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21685 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21688 \begin_layout Itemize
21690 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21699 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21700 bold top/bottom lines (see
21711 \begin_layout Standard
21713 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21714 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21715 button can be changed in
21717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21718 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21722 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21726 \begin_layout Subsection
21730 \begin_layout Standard
21731 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21734 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21738 This brings up the table dialog.
21739 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21740 cursor is placed currently.
21741 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21742 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21743 done on all of your selection.
21746 \begin_layout Standard
21747 In addition to the table dialog, the
21750 \begin_inset space ~
21755 helps you in setting table properties.
21756 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21768 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21769 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21770 current cell respectively.
21771 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21773 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21774 of text, see section
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21781 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21788 \begin_layout Standard
21789 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21790 using the check box
21799 This will merge the cells to
21803 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21804 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21805 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21806 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21807 in the last row without the upper border:
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21812 \begin_inset Tabular
21813 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21814 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21816 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21951 -arguments for the table.
21952 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21953 explained in the chapter
21960 \begin_inset space ~
21966 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21967 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21968 but are visible in the output.
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 Most DVI-viewers are
21984 able to display rotations.
21992 \begin_layout Standard
21997 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22002 adds lines for all cell borders.
22005 \begin_layout Subsection
22007 \begin_inset Index idx
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 Tables ! Multi-page
22017 \begin_inset Index idx
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 \begin_layout Standard
22030 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset space ~
22050 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22051 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22054 \begin_layout Description
22059 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22060 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22061 Except for the first page, if
22064 \begin_inset space ~
22072 \begin_layout Description
22076 \begin_inset space ~
22081 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22082 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22085 \begin_layout Description
22090 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22091 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22092 except for the last page, if
22095 \begin_inset space ~
22103 \begin_layout Description
22107 \begin_inset space ~
22112 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22113 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22116 \begin_layout Description
22117 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22118 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22124 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22127 \begin_inset space ~
22135 \begin_layout Standard
22136 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22137 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22138 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22144 In this context, first means first in this order:
22147 \begin_inset space ~
22159 \begin_inset space ~
22164 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22167 \begin_layout Standard
22169 \begin_inset Tabular
22170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22171 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22172 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22173 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22174 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22175 <row endfirsthead="true">
22176 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22187 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <row endfirsthead="true">
22207 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 <row endhead="true">
22240 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <row endhead="true">
22271 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <row endfoot="true">
22304 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <row endlastfoot="true">
24286 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 \begin_layout Subsection
24325 \begin_inset Index idx
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24337 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24344 \begin_layout Standard
24345 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24346 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24347 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24348 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24352 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24355 \begin_layout Standard
24356 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24357 for the column in the table dialog.
24358 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24359 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24363 \begin_layout Standard
24365 \begin_inset Tabular
24366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24367 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24369 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 This is longer now.
24520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24571 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24572 This is longer now.
24577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 \begin_layout Standard
24604 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24605 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24611 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24617 Selection with the mouse or with
24621 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24622 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24623 the selection from outside the table.
24626 \begin_layout Section
24628 \begin_inset Index idx
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24647 \begin_layout Subsection
24651 \begin_layout Standard
24652 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24653 have a fixed location.
24655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24662 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24670 \begin_inset space ~
24675 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24676 too many notes on the current page.
24679 \begin_layout Standard
24680 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24681 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24682 and pages without text.
24683 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24684 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24685 Floats are therefore numbered.
24686 Referencing is described in section
24687 \begin_inset space ~
24691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24693 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 To insert a float, use the menu
24703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24707 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24708 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24710 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24711 \begin_inset Index idx
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24721 paragraph within the float.
24722 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24723 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24724 left-clicking on the box label.
24725 A closed float box looks like this:
24726 \begin_inset Graphics
24727 filename clipart/float.png
24732 – a gray button with a red label.
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24736 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24738 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24741 \begin_layout Subsection
24743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24745 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24750 \begin_inset Index idx
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 Floats ! Figure floats
24762 \begin_layout Standard
24764 \begin_inset space ~
24768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24770 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24774 was created using the menu
24776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24777 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24783 arg "float-insert figure"
24787 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24796 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24800 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24801 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24803 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24805 \begin_inset space ~
24813 arg "layout-paragraph"
24819 \begin_layout Standard
24820 \begin_inset Float figure
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 \begin_inset Graphics
24830 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24845 name "fig:A-star-in"
24862 \begin_layout Standard
24863 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24864 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24875 ) and refer to it using the menu
24877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24883 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24887 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24888 vague references like
24889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24896 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24897 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24907 For more about cross-references, see section
24908 \begin_inset space ~
24912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24914 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24921 \begin_layout Standard
24922 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24923 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24924 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24925 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24926 as described in section
24927 \begin_inset space ~
24931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24933 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24939 \begin_inset space ~
24943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24945 reference "fig:Two-images"
24949 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24950 You can also set the images one below the other.
24952 \begin_inset space ~
24956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24958 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24965 reference "fig:Star"
24969 are the subfigures.
24972 \begin_layout Standard
24973 \begin_inset Float figure
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24985 \begin_inset Float figure
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24998 name "fig:Undefinable"
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25011 \begin_inset Graphics
25012 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25028 \begin_inset Float figure
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_inset Graphics
25055 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25067 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25079 name "fig:Two-images"
25096 \begin_layout Subsection
25098 \begin_inset Index idx
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 Floats ! Table floats
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25111 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25114 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25117 or the toolbar button
25120 arg "float-insert table"
25124 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25125 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25126 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25128 \begin_inset space ~
25132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25134 reference "tab:Table-float"
25141 \begin_layout Standard
25142 \begin_inset Float table
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25155 name "tab:Table-float"
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 \begin_inset Tabular
25170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25325 \end{array}\right]$
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25367 \begin_layout Subsection
25369 \begin_inset Index idx
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25383 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25384 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25385 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25387 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25395 \begin_inset space ~
25403 \begin_layout Section
25405 \begin_inset Index idx
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25419 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25421 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25422 \begin_inset space \space{}
25429 \begin_layout Standard
25430 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25431 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25437 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25438 and its alignment within the page.
25441 \begin_layout Standard
25443 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25453 height_special "totalheight"
25458 backgroundcolor "none"
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 This is a minipage.
25465 The text is set in an italic style.
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25472 another formatting.
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25481 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25484 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25488 as described in section
25489 \begin_inset space ~
25493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25495 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25500 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25506 \begin_layout Standard
25507 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25517 height_special "totalheight"
25522 backgroundcolor "none"
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25527 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25537 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25547 height_special "totalheight"
25552 backgroundcolor "none"
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25557 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25575 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25582 \begin_inset space ~
25590 \begin_layout Chapter
25591 Mathematical Formulas
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_inset Index idx
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25636 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25649 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25652 \begin_layout Section
25654 \begin_inset Index idx
25657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25680 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25682 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25683 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25684 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25697 \begin_inset space ~
25702 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25707 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 This is a line with an inline formula
25712 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25718 \begin_layout Standard
25719 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25720 paragraph, like this one:
25721 \begin_inset Formula
25728 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25733 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25735 For example, typing
25736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25749 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25750 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25754 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25757 \begin_inset space ~
25765 \begin_layout Subsection
25766 Navigating in Formulas
25767 \begin_inset Index idx
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 \begin_layout Standard
25780 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25781 achieved with the arrow keys.
25783 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25784 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25789 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25790 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25794 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25798 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25801 \end{array}\right]$
25809 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25814 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25815 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25818 \begin_layout Standard
25823 , printed in this document as
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25828 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25835 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25836 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25837 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25842 For example, if you want
25843 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25851 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25861 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25865 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25870 , since in the latter case only the
25873 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25878 will be under the square root sign:
25879 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25885 \begin_layout Standard
25886 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25888 \begin_inset Formula
25890 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25899 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25900 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25903 \begin_layout Subsection
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25908 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25909 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25913 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25914 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25915 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25916 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25917 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25921 \begin_layout Subsection
25922 Exponents and Subscripts
25923 \begin_inset Index idx
25926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25933 \begin_inset Index idx
25936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25945 \begin_layout Standard
25946 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25949 arg "math-superscript"
25955 arg "math-subscript"
25958 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25963 , type in a formula
25966 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25976 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25982 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25986 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25992 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25998 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26007 , you have to use an extra
26011 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26012 For example, if you want
26013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26025 Subscripts are similar: To get
26026 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26032 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26040 \begin_layout Subsection
26042 \begin_inset Index idx
26045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 \begin_layout Standard
26055 Create a fraction either with the command
26061 or by using the icon
26064 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26070 \begin_inset space ~
26076 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26077 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26078 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26083 To move back up, press
26088 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26089 \begin_inset Formula
26091 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26094 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26102 \begin_layout Subsection
26104 \begin_inset Index idx
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 Roots can be created using the
26120 \begin_inset space ~
26128 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26134 arg "math-insert \\root"
26156 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26162 always produces a square root.
26165 \begin_layout Subsection
26166 Operators with Limits
26167 \begin_inset Index idx
26170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26177 \begin_inset Index idx
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26189 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26198 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26202 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26205 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26206 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26207 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26208 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26209 The sum operator will automatically place its
26210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26217 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26219 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26223 \begin_inset Formula
26225 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26230 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26234 \begin_layout Standard
26235 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26237 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26238 behind the operator and using the menu
26240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26241 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26262 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26271 \begin_inset Index idx
26274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26281 \begin_inset Formula
26283 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26288 which will place the
26289 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26301 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26302 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26316 Have a look at section
26317 \begin_inset space ~
26321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26323 reference "subsec:Functions"
26327 for an explanation of function macros.
26330 \begin_layout Subsection
26332 \begin_inset Index idx
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26345 Most math symbols can be found in the
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26353 under one of several categories; including
26370 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26375 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26376 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26377 don't have to use the
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26385 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26387 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26390 \begin_layout Subsection
26392 \begin_inset Index idx
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26411 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26417 \begin_inset space ~
26425 arg "math-insert \\space"
26429 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26430 For example, the sequence
26435 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26438 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26440 \begin_inset Graphics
26441 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26446 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26447 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26448 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26449 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26450 , because they are negative
26452 Here are two examples:
26455 \begin_layout Standard
26465 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26471 \begin_layout Standard
26481 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26487 \begin_layout Subsection
26489 \begin_inset Index idx
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26501 name "subsec:Functions"
26508 \begin_layout Standard
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26517 contains under the button
26520 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26523 a number of function macros, such as
26524 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26528 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26536 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26543 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26544 avoid confusions, because
26545 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26549 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26555 \begin_layout Standard
26556 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26558 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26562 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26568 \begin_layout Standard
26569 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26570 are placed, as described in section
26571 \begin_inset space ~
26575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26577 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26584 \begin_layout Subsection
26586 \begin_inset Index idx
26589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26601 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26602 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26603 commands, for example, to enter
26604 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26607 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26608 Our example is entered by typing
26613 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26626 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26630 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26633 \begin_layout Standard
26634 \begin_inset Float table
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26647 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26651 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 \begin_inset Tabular
26662 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26663 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26664 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26750 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27074 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27128 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27227 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27252 \begin_inset space ~
27260 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27263 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27267 \begin_layout Section
27268 Brackets and Delimiters
27269 \begin_inset Index idx
27272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 \begin_inset Index idx
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27291 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27298 \begin_layout Standard
27299 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27301 For some purposes, using just the keys
27306 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27307 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27308 toolbar delimiter icon
27311 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27315 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27316 \begin_inset Formula
27318 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27326 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27327 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27331 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27334 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27340 \begin_inset Formula
27342 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27351 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27352 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27357 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27358 left side and right side.
27359 If you use the option
27362 \begin_inset space ~
27367 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27368 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27370 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27375 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27376 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27379 \begin_layout Standard
27380 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27381 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27382 is to go inside the brackets.
27383 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27388 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27389 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27390 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27394 arg "math-delim ( )"
27400 \begin_layout Section
27401 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27402 \begin_inset Index idx
27405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 \begin_inset Index idx
27415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27422 \begin_inset Index idx
27425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27426 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27434 \begin_layout Standard
27435 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27439 \begin_inset space ~
27447 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27451 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27452 Here is an example:
27453 \begin_inset Formula
27455 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27464 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27471 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27476 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27477 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27478 This alignment is set in the box
27483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27532 for every column as default.
27533 For example, the sequence
27534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27546 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27547 corresponds to the relevant column.
27548 The result will look like this:
27549 \begin_inset Formula
27552 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27553 column & has & has\,right\\
27554 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27567 arg "newline-insert newline"
27570 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27571 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27576 or the math toolbar.
27579 \begin_layout Standard
27580 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27581 It can be created with the menu
27583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27584 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27586 \begin_inset space ~
27598 Here is an example:
27599 \begin_inset Formula
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27614 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27617 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27620 arg "newline-insert newline"
27624 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27629 arg "newline-insert newline"
27632 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27640 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27641 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27642 A new row is created by every further entry of
27645 arg "newline-insert newline"
27649 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27650 Here is an example:
27651 \begin_inset Formula
27653 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27654 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27659 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27660 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27661 \begin_inset Formula
27663 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27671 \begin_layout Standard
27672 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27679 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27680 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27683 reference "eq:asquared"
27688 The other types are described in section
27689 \begin_inset space ~
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27695 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27702 \begin_layout Section
27703 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27704 \begin_inset Index idx
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27708 Math ! Formula numbering
27714 \begin_inset Index idx
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 Math ! Referencing formulas
27724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27726 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27737 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27739 \begin_inset space ~
27743 \begin_inset space ~
27751 arg "math-number-toggle"
27755 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27756 within parentheses.
27757 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27758 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27759 the document class.
27760 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27761 separated by a dot:
27762 \begin_inset Formula
27772 arg "math-number-toggle"
27775 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27776 You can only number displayed formulas.
27779 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27783 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27785 \begin_inset space ~
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27797 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27800 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27801 \begin_inset Formula
27804 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27810 To number all lines use the shortcut
27813 arg "math-number-toggle"
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27823 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27824 A label is inserted with the menu
27826 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27835 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27836 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27837 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27850 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27851 We inserted in the following example the label
27852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27859 in the second line:
27860 \begin_inset Formula
27862 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27863 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27868 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27869 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27870 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27882 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27886 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27887 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27888 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27889 as the formula number:
27892 \begin_layout Standard
27893 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27896 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27903 \begin_layout Standard
27904 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27905 's cross-reference box are described in section
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27912 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27917 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27925 \begin_layout Section
27926 User defined math macros
27927 \begin_inset Index idx
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27941 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27942 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27943 Math macros are explained in section
27946 \begin_inset space ~
27958 \begin_layout Section
27962 \begin_layout Subsection
27964 \begin_inset Index idx
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27977 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27978 To set a font in a formula, use the
27981 \begin_inset space ~
27989 arg "math-insert \\font"
27992 , or enter its command, listed in table
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28007 \begin_inset Float table
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28020 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28024 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 \begin_inset Tabular
28035 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28036 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28070 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28157 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28315 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28331 \begin_layout Standard
28332 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28333 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28338 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28339 space when you need a space in the box.
28340 Here is an example where
28341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28352 denotes the set of numbers:
28353 \begin_inset Formula
28355 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28364 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28365 You can, for example, put a character in
28374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28378 \begin_inset Newline newline
28381 So it is better not to use this feature.
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28390 \begin_inset Newline newline
28393 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28399 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28400 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28413 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28420 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28422 \begin_inset space ~
28430 \begin_layout Subsection
28432 \begin_inset Index idx
28435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 \begin_layout Standard
28445 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28447 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28451 \begin_inset space ~
28455 \begin_inset space ~
28463 \begin_inset space ~
28471 arg "math-insert \\font"
28475 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28476 in black instead of blue.
28477 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28478 Here is an example:
28479 \begin_inset Formula
28482 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28483 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28492 \begin_layout Subsection
28494 \begin_inset Index idx
28497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28507 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28508 automatically chosen in most situations.
28526 For most characters,
28534 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28535 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28540 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28541 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28542 thinks are appropriate.
28543 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28546 arg "math-insert \\style"
28550 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28551 For example, you can set
28552 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28555 , which is normally in
28564 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28568 The four styles are used in the following example:
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28572 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28576 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28580 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28584 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28590 \begin_layout Standard
28591 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28592 is set in a particular size with the menu
28594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28596 \begin_inset space ~
28601 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28602 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28603 will be adjusted to correspond.
28604 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28619 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28625 \begin_layout Section
28626 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28628 \begin_inset Index idx
28631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 \begin_inset Index idx
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28652 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28653 that are in common use.
28656 \begin_layout Subsection
28657 Enabling AMS-Support
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28662 the document by selecting the checkbox
28665 \begin_inset space ~
28669 \begin_inset space ~
28673 \begin_inset space ~
28680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28684 \begin_inset Index idx
28687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 Document ! Settings
28696 \begin_inset space ~
28702 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28703 -errors in formulas,
28704 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28707 \begin_layout Subsection
28709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28711 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28716 \begin_inset Index idx
28719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28728 \begin_layout Standard
28729 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28730 provides a selection of different formula types.
28732 allows you to choose between
28753 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28761 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28764 \begin_layout Chapter
28768 \begin_layout Section
28770 \begin_inset Index idx
28773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28782 name "sec:Cross-References"
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28790 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28791 's strengths is cross-references.
28792 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28794 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28795 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28796 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28799 \begin_layout Enumerate
28803 \begin_layout Enumerate
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28806 name "enu:Second-item"
28813 \begin_layout Enumerate
28817 \begin_layout Standard
28818 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28823 or by pressing the toolbar button
28830 A gray label box like this:
28831 \begin_inset Graphics
28832 filename clipart/label.png
28836 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28838 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28873 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28874 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28890 \begin_layout Standard
28891 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28896 or the toolbar button
28899 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28903 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28904 \begin_inset Graphics
28905 filename clipart/reference.png
28909 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28911 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28924 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 As an alternative to
28931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28934 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28939 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28940 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28954 \begin_layout Standard
28955 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "enu:Second-item"
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28970 It is recommended to use a protected space
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 described in section
28976 \begin_inset space ~
28980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28982 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28991 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28992 line breaks between them.
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28999 \begin_layout Description
29000 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29003 reference "fig:Two-images"
29010 \begin_layout Description
29011 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29012 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29024 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29031 \begin_layout Description
29032 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29038 LatexCommand pageref
29039 reference "fig:Two-images"
29046 \begin_layout Description
29048 \begin_inset space ~
29052 \begin_inset space ~
29055 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29057 LatexCommand vpageref
29058 reference "fig:Two-images"
29063 \begin_inset Newline newline
29066 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29067 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29068 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29069 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29070 it prints “on the next page”.
29071 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29074 \begin_layout Description
29076 \begin_inset space ~
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29084 \begin_inset space ~
29087 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29090 reference "fig:Two-images"
29095 \begin_inset Newline newline
29098 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29104 ; otherwise it behaves like
29108 \begin_inset space ~
29112 \begin_inset space ~
29121 \begin_layout Description
29123 \begin_inset space ~
29126 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29127 \begin_inset Newline newline
29131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29139 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29149 \begin_inset Index idx
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29154 packages ! prettyref
29160 \begin_inset Index idx
29163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29165 packages ! refstyle
29176 \begin_inset Newline newline
29179 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29180 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29183 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 is the default and preferred because
29200 supports only English documents.
29201 The format is specified by using the command
29213 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29214 preamble of the document.
29215 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29233 \begin_inset Newline newline
29240 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29245 \begin_inset Newline newline
29256 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29257 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29259 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29260 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29265 , you might do so as follows:
29266 \begin_inset Newline newline
29273 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29278 \begin_inset Newline newline
29281 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29282 the package documentation
29283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29285 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29291 \begin_inset Newline newline
29302 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29309 \begin_layout Description
29311 \begin_inset space ~
29314 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29316 LatexCommand nameref
29317 reference "fig:Two-images"
29324 \begin_layout Description
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29329 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29330 label for the reference:
29331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29332 LatexCommand labelonly
29333 reference "fig:Two-images"
29338 \begin_inset Newline newline
29341 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29342 Code, if you want to issue a command
29343 that \SpecialChar LyX
29349 , then you may want to use the
29352 \begin_inset space ~
29357 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29367 This is the form needed for e.
29368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29372 \begin_inset space \space{}
29379 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29380 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29386 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29391 You can only use the style
29395 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29399 is always possible.
29402 \begin_layout Standard
29403 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29404 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29406 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29413 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29420 \begin_layout Standard
29421 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29425 \begin_inset space ~
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29434 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29435 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29438 \begin_inset space ~
29443 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29444 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29447 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29454 You can change labels at any time.
29455 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29456 do not need to think about this.
29459 \begin_layout Standard
29460 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29462 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29466 \begin_layout Standard
29467 References are described in detail in the section
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29486 \begin_layout Section
29487 Table of Contents and other Listings
29488 \begin_inset Index idx
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 \begin_inset Index idx
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 Navigating ! Outline
29508 \begin_inset Index idx
29511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29527 \begin_layout Subsection
29529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29544 \begin_inset space ~
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29554 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29556 If you click on it, the
29560 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29561 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29562 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29564 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29566 \begin_inset space ~
29571 that is described in section
29572 \begin_inset space ~
29576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29578 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29587 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29589 \begin_inset space ~
29593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29595 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29599 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29601 \begin_inset space ~
29605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29607 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29611 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29613 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29616 \begin_layout Subsection
29617 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29620 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29627 \begin_layout Standard
29628 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29630 You can insert them via the
29632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29633 List/Contents/References
29636 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29639 \begin_layout Section
29640 URLs and Hyperlinks
29641 \begin_inset Index idx
29644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 \begin_layout Subsection
29665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29686 \begin_inset Flex URL
29689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29691 https://www.lyx.org
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29700 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29706 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29710 \begin_layout Standard
29711 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29719 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29728 \begin_layout Subsection
29730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29732 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29745 or with the toolbar button
29752 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29761 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29762 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29765 name "LyX's homepage"
29766 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29771 , an Email address like this:
29772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29774 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29775 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29781 , or a link to a file.
29786 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29794 \begin_layout Standard
29795 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 to the link target.
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29813 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29814 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29815 the text style dialog.
29816 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29822 name "LyX's homepage"
29823 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29832 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29836 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29839 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29845 \begin_inset Newline newline
29853 \begin_inset Newline newline
29860 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29861 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
29865 \begin_layout Section
29867 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
29869 \begin_inset Index idx
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29881 name "sec:Counters"
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29890 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
29891 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29892 is its ability to manage counters.
29893 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
29894 modify counters directly.
29895 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
29897 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
29898 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
29899 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
29900 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
29901 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29907 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
29908 There are five commands you can use:
29911 \begin_layout Enumerate
29913 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
29914 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
29917 \begin_layout Enumerate
29919 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
29920 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
29921 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
29924 \begin_layout Enumerate
29926 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
29927 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
29930 \begin_layout Enumerate
29932 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
29933 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
29937 \begin_layout Enumerate
29939 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
29940 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29945 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
29946 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
29947 those that are available in the current document class.
29952 \begin_layout Section
29954 \begin_inset Index idx
29957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29966 name "sec:Appendices"
29973 \begin_layout Standard
29974 Appendices are created with the menu
29976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29988 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29989 as the appendix part of the book.
29990 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29993 \begin_layout Standard
29994 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29995 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29996 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29997 and the subsection number.
29998 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30010 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30024 reference "subsec:Export"
30031 \begin_layout Section
30033 \begin_inset Index idx
30036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30045 name "sec:Bibliography"
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30053 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30055 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30056 \begin_inset space ~
30060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30062 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30069 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30074 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30081 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30086 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30087 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30088 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30092 using a bibliography database.
30095 \begin_layout Standard
30096 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30097 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30101 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30102 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30103 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30104 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30105 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30108 \begin_layout Subsection
30109 The Bibliography Environment
30110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30112 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30119 \begin_layout Standard
30124 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30126 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30135 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30137 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30138 of ASCII characters only.
30142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30147 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30153 \begin_inset Newline newline
30157 \begin_inset Flex URL
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30162 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30172 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30182 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30183 \begin_inset Newline newline
30190 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30191 the number of the entry.
30196 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30205 \begin_layout Standard
30206 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30211 or the toolbar button
30214 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30218 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30219 containing the available citations.
30220 Select one or more keys from the list and
30230 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30231 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30235 \begin_layout Standard
30236 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30237 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30238 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30254 Companion Second Edition
30257 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30259 key "latexcompanion"
30267 \begin_layout Standard
30268 The \SpecialChar LyX
30269 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30281 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30288 \begin_inset Index idx
30291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30300 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30301 the label needs to be given the form
30302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30313 Author A and Author B(Year)
30314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30321 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30328 \begin_inset space ~
30333 in the document settings
30334 \begin_inset Index idx
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30338 Document ! Settings
30345 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30347 \begin_inset space ~
30353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30355 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30363 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30365 Once you have done that, the
30369 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30386 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30387 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30388 These two are madatory.
30389 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30392 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30394 ) and in abrreviated form (
30401 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30402 add the abbreviated form to
30406 and the full list to the optional
30414 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30415 If specified like this,
30417 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30418 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30428 is specified, toggling
30429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30436 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30437 full and abbreviated list
30441 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30442 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30443 the citation references.
30444 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30450 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30453 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30455 \begin_inset space ~
30463 arg "layout-paragraph"
30467 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30470 \begin_layout Subsection
30471 Bibliography databases
30472 \begin_inset Index idx
30475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30476 Bibliography ! Databases
30482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30484 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30500 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30501 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30506 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30508 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30509 your working field in a database.
30510 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30511 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30512 list for that document.
30513 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 The database is a text file with the file extension
30519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30530 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30531 The format is explained in
30532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30539 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30543 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30549 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30550 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30551 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30553 \begin_inset Flex URL
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30568 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30569 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30570 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30572 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30574 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30575 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30576 Those are addressed by
30581 \begin_inset Index idx
30584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30586 packages ! biblatex
30592 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30593 (although it has been significantly
30594 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30605 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30606 might conversely fail to correctly
30607 handle databases that use specific
30616 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30620 \begin_layout Standard
30621 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30626 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30632 \begin_inset Index idx
30635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 Document ! Settings
30648 \begin_inset space ~
30653 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30662 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30664 \begin_inset Index idx
30667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30668 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30677 \begin_layout Standard
30678 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30682 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30690 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30691 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30699 Add bibliography to TOC
30701 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30706 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30707 in the document or just the cited references.
30709 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30714 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30715 differ from the encoding of the document.
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30722 style file is a text file with the file extension
30723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30734 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30735 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30736 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30737 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30739 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30746 \begin_inset Newline newline
30750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30752 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30762 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30767 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30771 \begin_layout Standard
30772 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30777 \begin_inset Index idx
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30781 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30787 \begin_inset Index idx
30790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30792 packages ! biblatex
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30801 Accessing a database via
30805 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30809 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30817 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30818 you cannot select a
30823 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30827 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30830 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30831 As for the styles, note the following.
30836 \begin_layout Standard
30841 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30854 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30855 file (text file with the file extension
30856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30867 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30868 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30870 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30874 \begin_layout Standard
30879 styles are not set in the
30882 \begin_inset space ~
30887 dialog, but in the document settings.
30888 \begin_inset Index idx
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30892 Document ! Settings
30897 However, in the dialog in the
30901 field, which is only visible if you use
30905 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30906 example how its heading will appear).
30907 These options are described in detail in the
30912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30922 \begin_layout Standard
30923 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30924 \begin_inset space ~
30928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30930 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30941 Bibliography Processors
30944 \begin_layout Standard
30945 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30946 uses a bibliography processor,
30947 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30948 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30949 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30951 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30952 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30955 \begin_layout Standard
30956 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30958 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30959 You can do this on a general level in
30961 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30962 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30963 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30966 or for individual documents in
30968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30973 The following variants are available by default:
30976 \begin_layout Description
30977 biber a specific, modern processor
30978 \begin_inset Index idx
30981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30988 developed exclusively for
30992 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30998 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31003 makes use of; if you use the
31007 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31014 \begin_layout Description
31015 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31016 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31017 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31021 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31024 \begin_layout Description
31025 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31026 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31030 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31034 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31038 features are supported.
31041 \begin_layout Standard
31042 By default (with the
31048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31062 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31063 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31064 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31067 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31068 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31081 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31082 -based bibliography styles).
31083 This should suit most needs.
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31088 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31089 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31094 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31095 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31096 You can adjust it in
31098 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31099 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31100 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31106 \begin_layout Standard
31107 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31108 can add below the selection.
31109 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31110 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31116 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31130 \begin_layout Standard
31132 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31134 These are explained in detail in section
31136 Customizing Bibliographies
31140 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31145 Additional Features
31150 \begin_layout Subsection
31152 \begin_inset Index idx
31155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31156 Bibliography ! Citation format
31162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31164 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31171 \begin_layout Standard
31172 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31177 \begin_inset space \space{}
31180 numerical citation (as
31181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31188 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31196 ) or author-year citations (as
31197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31206 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31211 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31215 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31219 \begin_inset Index idx
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31223 Document ! Settings
31228 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31234 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31235 labels, is there to use
31238 \begin_inset space ~
31249 \begin_inset space ~
31254 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31257 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 With a bibliography database (see
31266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31268 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31275 ) one has in contrary to the
31279 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31280 These style formats are available:
31283 \begin_layout Description
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31288 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31289 -based approached without any additional packages
31290 (simple numeric citations).
31293 \begin_layout Description
31294 Biblatex loads the package
31299 \begin_inset Index idx
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 packages ! biblatex
31309 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31311 Biblatex citation style
31315 Biblatex bibliography style
31318 Options to the package
31322 can be entered in the
31329 \begin_layout Description
31331 \begin_inset space ~
31335 \begin_inset space ~
31338 mode) loads the package
31342 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31343 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31355 behavior very closely.
31360 this option has some additional styles.
31365 styles are also supported by this variant.
31368 \begin_layout Description
31370 \begin_inset space ~
31373 (BibTeX) loads the package
31378 \begin_inset Index idx
31381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31388 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31391 \begin_layout Description
31393 \begin_inset space ~
31396 (BibTeX) loads the package
31401 \begin_inset Index idx
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31411 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31414 \begin_layout Standard
31423 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31425 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31434 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31436 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31437 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31439 Biblatex citation style
31442 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31448 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31452 \begin_layout Standard
31453 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31454 are available in the
31459 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31460 a name prefix such as
31461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31476 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31481 \begin_inset space \space{}
31485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31496 \begin_layout Standard
31497 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31503 \begin_inset space \space{}
31506 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31512 \begin_inset space \space{}
31516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31528 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31540 \begin_inset space ~
31546 Here is a simple example where the text
31547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31551 \begin_inset space ~
31555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31558 appears after the reference:
31561 \begin_layout Quote
31563 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31566 key "latexcompanion"
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31575 All styles except for
31579 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31589 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31593 \begin_layout Standard
31594 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31595 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31596 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31601 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31602 multi-citation (so-called
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31606 qualified citation lists
31607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31618 dialog will display three columns in the field
31625 \begin_inset space ~
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31641 \begin_inset space ~
31647 If you double-click on an item's
31650 \begin_inset space ~
31658 \begin_inset space ~
31663 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31666 General text before
31672 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31675 \begin_layout Section
31677 \begin_inset Index idx
31680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31697 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31701 \begin_inset space ~
31706 or the toolbar button
31713 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31714 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31715 by \SpecialChar LyX
31716 as the index entry.
31719 \begin_layout Standard
31720 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31723 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31725 \begin_inset space ~
31731 A light blue box labeled
31732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31743 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31744 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31750 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31751 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31752 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31756 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31764 \begin_layout Subsection
31765 Grouping Index Entries
31766 \begin_inset Index idx
31769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31779 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31781 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31782 lists under the entry
31783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31791 First we create the entry
31792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31800 \begin_inset space ~
31804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31806 reference "subsec:Lists"
31811 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31812 \begin_inset space ~
31816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31818 reference "sec:Itemize"
31822 , we insert the command
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31842 for the enumerated list in section
31843 \begin_inset space ~
31847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31849 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31857 The exclamation mark
31858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31865 marks the grouping levels.
31866 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31867 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31868 If we don't have an index entry for
31869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31876 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31879 \begin_layout Subsection
31881 \begin_inset Index idx
31884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 Index ! Page ranges
31893 \begin_layout Standard
31894 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31896 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31897 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31898 an index entry in section
31899 \begin_inset space ~
31903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31905 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31912 \begin_layout Standard
31915 Paragraph environments|(
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 and another entry at the end of section
31920 \begin_inset space ~
31924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31926 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31933 \begin_layout Standard
31936 Paragraph environments|)
31939 \begin_layout Standard
31941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31964 respectively start and end the index range.
31965 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31966 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31967 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31968 An example is the index entry
31969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31972 Document ! Settings
31973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31979 \begin_layout Subsection
31981 \begin_inset Index idx
31984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31985 Index ! Cross referencing
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31994 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31995 We referred for example in the index entry
31996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32004 \begin_inset space ~
32008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32010 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32014 ) to the index entry
32015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32022 in the same section using the entry
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32028 GIF|see{Image formats}
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32032 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32034 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32035 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32038 \begin_layout Subsection
32040 \begin_inset Index idx
32043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 Index ! Entry order
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32054 follow the rules for the index order.
32055 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32061 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32063 \begin_inset space ~
32067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32069 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32078 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32079 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32104 \begin_inset Index idx
32107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32108 Dummy entries ! maïs
32114 \begin_inset Index idx
32117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 Dummy entries ! maître
32124 \begin_inset Index idx
32127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32133 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32134 maïs, maison, maître.
32135 To achieve this, we use the command
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32141 previous entry@current entry
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32145 In our case we want to have
32146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32161 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32170 \begin_layout Standard
32171 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32172 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32174 See the next subsection for an example.
32177 \begin_layout Subsection
32179 \begin_inset Index idx
32182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32183 Index ! Entry layout
32191 \begin_layout Standard
32192 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32193 \begin_inset Index idx
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32199 This is an italic dummy entry
32204 You can also format the page number using the character
32205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32212 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32213 -command without a backslash.
32214 We can write for example
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32220 italic page number:|textit
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 to get the page number in italic.
32225 \begin_inset Index idx
32228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32229 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32234 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32235 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32253 \begin_inset space ~
32259 Have a look at section
32260 \begin_inset space ~
32264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32266 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32270 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32283 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32287 to generate the index, see section
32288 \begin_inset space ~
32292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32294 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32303 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32308 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32309 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32312 key "latexcompanion"
32325 \begin_layout Standard
32326 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32328 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32329 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32330 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32331 If so, put the following in the preamble
32334 \begin_layout Standard
32346 \begin_layout Standard
32350 \begin_layout Standard
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 in the index entry.
32358 \begin_inset Index idx
32361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32362 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32367 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32368 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32369 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32372 \begin_layout Standard
32373 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32374 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32375 a bold font for all index entries.
32376 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32388 documentation for details,
32389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32391 key "makeindex,xindy"
32399 \begin_layout Subsection
32401 \begin_inset Index idx
32404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32413 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 If the index generation program
32425 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32426 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32430 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32431 distribution, is used.
32435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32440 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32441 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32442 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32443 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32444 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32454 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32456 dialog, see section
32457 \begin_inset space ~
32461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32463 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32468 The available options are listed and explained in
32469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32471 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32477 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32481 \begin_layout Standard
32482 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32483 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32491 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32492 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32495 \begin_layout Subsection
32499 \begin_layout Standard
32500 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32501 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32509 next to the standard index.
32511 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32512 that add this feature.
32519 \begin_inset Index idx
32522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 packages ! splitidx
32529 package to generate multiple indexes.
32530 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32536 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32546 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32547 style, but it also includes
32548 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32549 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32558 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32559 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32565 and select the option
32567 Use multiple Indexes
32574 already contains the standard index
32575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32583 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32584 also appear as a heading) to the
32588 input field and press the
32593 The new index now also appears in the list.
32594 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32595 label color to the new index.
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32599 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32603 List/Contents/References
32609 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32610 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32611 are additional features:
32614 \begin_layout Itemize
32615 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32616 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32619 \begin_layout Itemize
32620 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32621 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32626 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32627 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32628 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32629 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32632 \begin_layout Itemize
32637 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32638 code in the name of the index.
32641 \begin_layout Section
32642 Nomenclature/Glossary
32643 \begin_inset Index idx
32646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32653 \begin_inset Index idx
32656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32687 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32696 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32697 called nomenclature or glossary.
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32708 \begin_inset Index idx
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32719 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32728 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32734 and then use the menu
32736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32747 or the toolbar button
32750 arg "nomencl-insert"
32755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32770 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32771 The first is the term or
32775 that you wish to define.
32780 of the term or symbol.
32783 \begin_layout Standard
32784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32792 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32793 code for nomenclature entries the option
32797 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32805 \begin_layout Subsection
32806 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32807 \begin_inset Index idx
32810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32811 Nomenclature ! Layout
32819 \begin_layout Standard
32820 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32824 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32831 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32839 \begin_inset Newline newline
32847 \begin_inset Newline newline
32853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32860 character starts/ends the formula.
32861 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32862 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32874 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32886 syntax is given in section
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32893 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32909 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32911 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32916 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32923 in this document is:
32924 \begin_inset Newline newline
32929 dummy entry for the character
32934 \begin_inset Newline newline
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32956 font use the command
32985 \begin_layout Standard
32986 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32991 \begin_inset space \space{}
32995 \begin_inset Newline newline
33011 \begin_inset Newline newline
33014 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33015 This command will make the font of all symbols
33022 \begin_inset space ~
33030 \begin_layout Standard
33031 If the characters |
33032 \begin_inset space \space{}
33036 \begin_inset space \space{}
33040 \begin_inset space \space{}
33044 \begin_inset space \space{}
33048 \begin_inset space \space{}
33051 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33052 code they need to be escaped
33053 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33054 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33055 LatexCommand nomenclature
33056 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33057 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33065 \begin_layout Subsection
33066 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33067 \begin_inset Index idx
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33080 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33081 -code of the symbol
33083 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33085 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33088 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33089 LatexCommand nomenclature
33091 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33099 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33103 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33104 LatexCommand nomenclature
33107 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33113 They will be sorted by
33114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33140 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33143 will be sorted before the
33147 since the character
33148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33155 is considered in sorting.
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33159 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33167 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33168 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33170 For the example given, you can insert
33174 in this field for the
33175 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33182 will be located before
33183 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33189 \begin_layout Standard
33190 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33205 \begin_layout Subsection
33206 Nomenclature Options
33207 \begin_inset Index idx
33210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33211 Nomenclature ! Options
33217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33219 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33226 \begin_layout Standard
33231 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33232 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33235 \begin_layout Description
33236 refeq Appends the phrase
33237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33252 to every nomenclature entry, where
33258 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33261 \begin_layout Description
33262 refpage Appends the phrase
33263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33278 to every nomenclature entry, where
33284 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33287 \begin_layout Description
33288 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33293 class options list in the
33295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33299 In this document the options
33306 \begin_layout Standard
33307 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33313 \begin_layout Standard
33314 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33315 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33320 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33323 \begin_layout Description
33333 \begin_layout Description
33336 nomrefpage Like the
33343 \begin_layout Description
33346 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33355 \begin_layout Description
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33365 \begin_inset space ~
33370 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33373 \begin_layout Standard
33375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33382 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33383 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33387 \begin_layout Standard
33396 \begin_inset Newline newline
33402 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33406 \begin_inset space ~
33418 unskip, see equation
33421 \begin_inset Newline newline
33428 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33429 \begin_inset Newline newline
33435 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33460 \begin_inset space ~
33465 in the document settings under
33468 \begin_inset space ~
33476 \begin_layout Standard
33484 \begin_inset Newline newline
33488 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 \begin_inset space ~
33504 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33506 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33507 \begin_inset Newline newline
33514 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33515 \begin_inset Newline newline
33519 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33535 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33540 \begin_layout Subsection
33541 Printing the Nomenclature
33542 \begin_inset Index idx
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 Nomenclature ! Printing
33554 \begin_layout Standard
33555 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33558 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33574 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33575 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33576 You can choose between these settings:
33579 \begin_layout Description
33580 Default a space of 1
33581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33587 \begin_layout Description
33589 \begin_inset space ~
33593 \begin_inset space ~
33596 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33599 \begin_layout Description
33600 Custom custom space
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33613 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33621 For example, in order to change the name to
33625 , add the following line to the preamble:
33628 \begin_layout Standard
33641 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33646 \begin_inset Newline newline
33661 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33664 \begin_layout Subsection
33665 Nomenclature Program
33666 \begin_inset Index idx
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33670 Nomenclature ! Program
33676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33678 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33691 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33692 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33694 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33699 by adding options, see section
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33706 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33711 The available options are listed and explained in
33712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33714 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33722 \begin_layout Section
33724 \begin_inset Index idx
33727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 \begin_inset Index idx
33737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33738 Document ! Branches
33744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33746 name "sec:Branches"
33753 \begin_layout Standard
33754 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33755 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33756 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33757 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33760 \begin_layout Standard
33761 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33762 allows you to put text into branches.
33763 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33764 To create a branch, either select the menu
33766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33767 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33770 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33779 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33780 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33781 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33782 and whether the name of the branch should
33783 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33784 (see below for an example).
33785 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33786 to the name of the other) and to add
33787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33802 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33803 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33806 \begin_layout Standard
33807 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33808 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33813 where you can choose a branch.
33814 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33818 \begin_layout Standard
33819 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33820 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33823 \begin_layout Standard
33824 \begin_inset Branch Question
33828 \begin_layout Standard
33833 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33841 \begin_layout Standard
33842 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33846 \begin_layout Standard
33851 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33867 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33870 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33871 Consider for example a file
33872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33879 which has the above branches.
33881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33888 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33912 branch were inactive,
33913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33928 branch was active, likewise
33929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33944 branch was active, and
33945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33948 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33952 if both branches were active.
33953 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33954 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33960 \begin_layout Standard
33961 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33967 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33968 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33980 \begin_layout Standard
33981 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33998 branch is deactivated.
34004 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34012 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34013 definitions for each branch.
34014 For example you can define for the question branch
34018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34019 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34020 -syntax, see section
34021 \begin_inset space ~
34025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34027 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34039 \begin_layout Standard
34049 \begin_layout Standard
34059 \begin_layout Standard
34060 and for the answer branch
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 \begin_inset Branch Question
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34120 \begin_layout Standard
34121 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34158 Now it is possible to use the
34162 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34169 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34172 commands to obtain conditional output.
34173 Here is an example formula where only the
34180 \begin_inset Formula
34182 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34199 \begin_layout Standard
34200 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34206 \begin_inset space \space{}
34209 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34211 For this advanced usage, see the
34217 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34222 \begin_layout Section
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34226 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34231 \begin_inset Index idx
34234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34246 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34247 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34250 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34252 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34258 \begin_inset Index idx
34261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 packages ! hyperref
34268 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34269 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34270 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34271 part of the document.
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 The header information in the dialog tab
34280 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34281 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34282 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34283 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34287 \begin_inset space ~
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34296 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34297 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34298 and author entries.
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34315 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34319 You can specify in the dialog tab
34323 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34341 option allows long links to be split;
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34360 \begin_inset space ~
34365 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34368 \begin_inset space ~
34373 colors the different links.
34374 The default colors are:
34377 \begin_layout Labeling
34378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34383 for hyperlinks and URLs
34386 \begin_layout Labeling
34387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34395 \begin_layout Labeling
34396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34404 \begin_layout Standard
34405 but you can change these in the field
34410 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34416 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34419 \begin_layout Standard
34424 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34425 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34426 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34434 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34435 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34436 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34446 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34447 when opening the PDF.
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34452 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34456 1 will only display the sections.
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34461 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34467 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34478 \begin_layout Section
34480 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34484 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34491 \begin_layout Subsection
34494 \begin_inset Index idx
34497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34507 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34514 \begin_layout Standard
34515 As \SpecialChar LyX
34516 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34517 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34518 commands and constructs,
34521 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34522 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34523 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34524 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34525 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34526 cannot support all packages and
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34532 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34533 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34537 Code box is created by the menu
34539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34541 \begin_inset space ~
34546 or by the toolbar button
34559 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34570 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34572 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34577 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34582 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34589 , you can write the command part
34595 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34596 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34600 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34601 Code box behind the word.
34602 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34603 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34607 \begin_layout Standard
34608 \begin_inset Graphics
34609 filename clipart/ERT.png
34617 \begin_layout Standard
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 This is a line with a
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34658 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34659 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34660 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34661 know that the command is finished.
34669 \begin_layout Subsection
34670 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34672 \begin_inset Argument 1
34675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34676 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34683 \begin_inset Index idx
34686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34696 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34705 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34706 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34707 uses in the background.
34708 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34709 is based on commands, you can
34710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34718 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34719 any time if you know the right commands.
34720 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34721 is the end of the day.
34722 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34723 all caption labels bold.
34724 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34726 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34733 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34735 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 As result you find that the package
34754 \begin_inset Index idx
34757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34770 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34787 usepackage[options]{package name}
34790 \begin_layout Standard
34791 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34792 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34793 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34794 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 In your case the package name is
34803 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34808 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34809 So you add the command
34812 \begin_layout Standard
34817 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34820 \begin_layout Standard
34821 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 For more commands provided by the
34830 package, have a look at its documentation,
34831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34849 For example if you use a
34853 class, you don't need the package
34857 , you can instead write
34860 \begin_layout Standard
34865 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34870 \begin_layout Standard
34871 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34872 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34873 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34880 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34883 \begin_layout Standard
34884 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34885 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34887 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34888 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34889 Code box as described in the previous
34893 \begin_layout Standard
34894 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34895 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34900 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34908 \begin_layout Standard
34909 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34915 \begin_layout Standard
34919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34929 \begin_inset Note Note
34932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34941 \begin_layout Left Header
34942 \begin_inset Argument 1
34945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 \begin_inset Note Note
34968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34969 defines the header line as described below
34977 \begin_layout Center Header
34978 \begin_inset Argument 1
34981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34990 \begin_layout Right Header
34991 \begin_inset Argument 1
34994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35015 \begin_layout Left Footer
35016 \begin_inset Argument 1
35019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35040 \begin_layout Center Footer
35041 \begin_inset Argument 1
35044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35056 \begin_inset Newline newline
35060 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35066 \begin_layout Right Footer
35067 \begin_inset Argument 1
35070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35092 \begin_layout Section
35093 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35096 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35101 \begin_inset Index idx
35104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35105 Document ! Header/Footer line
35111 \begin_inset Index idx
35114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35123 \begin_layout Standard
35124 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35145 \begin_inset space ~
35151 As a second step add in the menu
35153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35154 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35163 Custom Header/Footerlines
35166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35170 This module offers the following 6
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35177 \begin_layout Description
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35201 \begin_layout Description
35203 \begin_inset space ~
35207 \begin_inset space ~
35211 \begin_inset space ~
35215 \begin_inset space ~
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35227 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35230 \begin_layout Standard
35231 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35232 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35240 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35244 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35247 \begin_layout Standard
35248 \begin_inset Float figure
35255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35258 \begin_inset Tabular
35259 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35260 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35262 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35263 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35283 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35323 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 The normal text on the page goes here.
35328 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35330 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35331 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35336 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35345 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35374 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35403 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35421 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35426 name "fig:Page-layout"
35430 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35452 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35456 \begin_inset space ~
35461 is set to “Default”.
35462 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35471 \begin_layout Subsection
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35477 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35478 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35479 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35481 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35483 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35486 \begin_layout Standard
35487 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35488 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35502 \begin_layout Description
35505 thepage prints the current page number
35508 \begin_layout Description
35511 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35514 \begin_layout Description
35517 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35520 \begin_layout Description
35523 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35524 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35531 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35534 because it usually goes in a left header.
35537 \begin_layout Description
35540 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35541 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35543 It is normally used in the right header.
35546 \begin_layout Subsection
35547 Default header/footer
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35552 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35553 footer has the page number.
35554 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35555 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35556 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35559 \begin_inset space ~
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35573 Some pages are different.
35574 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35575 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35576 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35577 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35578 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35582 Header and footer decoration line
35585 \begin_layout Standard
35586 By default, you get a 0.4
35587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35590 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35591 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35603 in the following way:
35606 \begin_layout Standard
35613 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35616 \begin_layout Standard
35617 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35630 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35637 \begin_layout Standard
35638 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35640 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35656 Several header/footer lines
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35661 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35662 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35664 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35697 headheight}{height}
35700 \begin_layout Standard
35705 is a size in standard units (e.
35706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35710 \begin_inset space \space{}
35718 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35719 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35720 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35721 logfile with the menu
35723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35738 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35743 \begin_inset Index idx
35746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 packages ! fancyhdr
35754 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35755 for your header/footer.
35758 \begin_layout Subsection
35762 \begin_layout Standard
35763 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35764 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35765 This example consists of the following definition:
35768 \begin_layout Description
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35779 , empty optional argument
35782 \begin_layout Description
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35787 Header empty, empty optional argument
35790 \begin_layout Description
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35801 in the optional argument
35804 \begin_layout Description
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35815 in the optional argument
35818 \begin_layout Description
35820 \begin_inset space ~
35833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35837 \begin_inset Newline newline
35841 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35848 in the optional argument
35851 \begin_layout Description
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35862 , empty optional argument
35865 \begin_layout Description
35868 headrulewidth set to 2
35869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35875 \begin_layout Standard
35876 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35877 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35893 \begin_layout Standard
35894 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35900 \begin_layout Standard
35904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35908 pagestyle{headings}
35914 \begin_inset Note Note
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35918 switches back to page style with the default headings
35926 \begin_layout Section
35927 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35930 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35935 \begin_inset Index idx
35938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35945 \begin_inset Index idx
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35959 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35960 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35961 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35964 \begin_layout Subsection
35968 \begin_layout Standard
35969 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35975 \begin_inset Index idx
35978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 packages ! preview-latex
35985 (on some systems named simply
35990 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35999 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36001 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36009 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36010 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36011 -package are automatically
36012 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36016 \begin_layout Subsection
36020 \begin_layout Standard
36021 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36022 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36024 activate the option
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36047 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36054 \begin_inset space ~
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36072 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36075 \begin_layout Standard
36076 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36081 \begin_inset space ~
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_layout Standard
36098 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36099 and when you finish
36103 \begin_layout Standard
36104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36112 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36113 generated by activating the option
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36122 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36130 \begin_layout Subsection
36131 Selected document parts
36134 \begin_layout Standard
36135 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36136 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36137 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36138 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36140 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36146 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36147 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36148 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36151 \begin_layout Standard
36152 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36159 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36171 is explained in section
36173 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36188 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36189 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36190 the final rotated boxes,
36191 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36192 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36194 Here is the result:
36197 \begin_layout Standard
36198 \begin_inset Preview
36200 \begin_layout Standard
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36209 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36215 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36225 height_special "totalheight"
36230 backgroundcolor "none"
36233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36264 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 \begin_layout Standard
36287 Previewing works also for colors.
36288 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 is explained in section
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 \begin_inset Preview
36330 \begin_layout Standard
36334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36358 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36377 \begin_layout Standard
36378 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 If \SpecialChar LyX
36386 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36387 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36388 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36389 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36390 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36391 the \SpecialChar TeX
36393 If \SpecialChar LyX
36394 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36395 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36397 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36398 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36399 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36402 \begin_layout Subsection
36407 \begin_layout Standard
36408 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36409 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36412 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36419 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36421 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36423 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36424 's main window, then only this selection
36425 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36426 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36427 the source view window.
36432 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36433 ; but note that if you have
36434 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36436 not just the one which is open at the time.
36439 \begin_layout Section
36440 Advanced Find and Replace
36441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36443 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36448 \begin_inset Index idx
36451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 \begin_inset Index idx
36461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36476 allows for searching of complex,
36477 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36479 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36480 The key-features are:
36483 \begin_layout Itemize
36484 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36485 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36486 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36490 \begin_layout Itemize
36491 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36492 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36493 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36494 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36497 \begin_layout Itemize
36498 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36499 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36500 outside of mathematics environments
36503 \begin_layout Itemize
36504 Search may be widened to a specific
36509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36516 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36517 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36524 \begin_layout Itemize
36525 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36526 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36531 \begin_inset space ~
36534 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36537 \begin_layout Subsection
36541 \begin_layout Standard
36542 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36557 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36560 ) or the toolbar button
36563 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36569 Advanced Find and Replace
36574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36578 \begin_layout Standard
36584 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36593 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36596 arg "paragraph-break"
36600 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36601 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36605 arg "paragraph-break"
36608 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36612 searches backwards.
36615 \begin_layout Standard
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36624 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36638 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36642 Searching for mathematics
36645 \begin_layout Standard
36646 Mathematical formulas, such as
36647 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36650 or something more complex like
36651 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36654 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36659 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36660 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36661 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36662 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36673 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36674 This is done by switching to the
36678 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36683 This way, entering in the
36690 \begin_layout Itemize
36691 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36692 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36695 \begin_layout Itemize
36696 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36697 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36700 \begin_layout Itemize
36701 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36702 of it only within section headings.
36703 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36704 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36708 \begin_layout Itemize
36709 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36710 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36717 \begin_layout Standard
36718 The entries made in the
36722 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36731 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36735 button or alternatively press
36738 arg "paragraph-break"
36745 while the cursor is in the
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36759 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36763 \begin_layout Itemize
36764 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36765 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36773 with its typewriter version
36774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36788 \begin_layout Itemize
36789 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36795 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36807 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36814 (you may want to enable the
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36830 options and disable the
36838 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36846 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36847 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36851 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36854 , or occurrences of
36855 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36859 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36865 \begin_layout Subsection
36869 \begin_layout Standard
36870 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36879 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36889 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36895 This is done with the context menu
36897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36898 Insert Regular Expression
36900 while the cursor is in the
36905 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36906 expression matching rules
36910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36911 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36921 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36922 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36928 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36929 same text in the document.
36930 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36931 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36934 \begin_layout Enumerate
36935 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36940 editor the fraction
36941 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36945 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36948 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36949 fractions with the given denominator.
36952 \begin_layout Enumerate
36953 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36965 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36970 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36971 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36972 Also, by inserting a
36973 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36976 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36977 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36982 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36983 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36986 , and referring back to them through
36987 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36991 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36995 For example, try searching with the regexp
36996 \begin_inset Newline newline
36999 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37002 \begin_inset Newline newline
37005 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37009 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37021 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37022 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37023 sub-expressions is absolute.
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37029 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37032 always refers to the first occurrence of
37033 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37036 in all entered regexps.
37044 \begin_layout Section
37046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37048 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37053 \begin_inset Index idx
37056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37067 has a built-in spell checker.
37070 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37077 key or the toolbar button
37080 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37083 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37084 beginning of the currently selected text.
37085 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37086 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37087 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37088 scrolled so that it is visible.
37089 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37090 n, if any could be found.
37091 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37095 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37096 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37107 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37108 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37110 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37111 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37114 \begin_inset space ~
37122 arg "dialog-show character"
37125 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37127 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37130 \begin_layout Standard
37131 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37132 can be downloaded from here:
37133 \begin_inset Newline newline
37137 \begin_inset Flex URL
37140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37142 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37148 \begin_inset Newline newline
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37155 files for each language.
37156 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37160 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37161 's installation subfolder
37169 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37171 \begin_inset Newline newline
37174 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37175 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37176 but in most cases these are
37192 is the language code.
37195 \begin_layout Subsection
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37203 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37211 you can set the following things:
37214 \begin_layout Description
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37219 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37220 should use for spell checking.
37221 Depending on your platform,
37231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37232 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37233 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37251 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37254 \begin_layout Description
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37259 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37260 will always use the given language
37261 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37264 \begin_layout Description
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37269 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37275 \begin_inset space \space{}
37279 This should normally not be needed.
37282 \begin_layout Description
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37291 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37303 \begin_layout Description
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37308 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37309 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37310 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37311 appear in a context menu.
37312 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37316 \begin_layout Description
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37329 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37333 \begin_layout Section
37335 \begin_inset Index idx
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37347 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37354 \begin_layout Standard
37356 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37357 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37369 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37379 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37381 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37382 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37383 which are available for many languages.
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37387 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37388 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37392 \begin_layout Subsection
37393 Setting up the thesaurus
37396 \begin_layout Standard
37405 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37409 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37414 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37428 For instance, the US English files are named:
37431 \begin_layout Itemize
37435 \begin_layout Itemize
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37448 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37449 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37454 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 ) to the path where they are installed.
37465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37466 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37467 ies, typical locations are
37473 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37477 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37481 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37484 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37490 LibreOffice-<Version>
37497 On the Mac, the default location is
37499 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37500 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37501 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37502 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37503 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37504 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37512 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37513 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37514 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37518 \begin_layout Standard
37519 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37520 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37522 \begin_inset Newline newline
37526 \begin_inset Flex URL
37529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37531 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37539 \begin_layout Standard
37540 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37541 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37543 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37544 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37545 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37552 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37554 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37555 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37562 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37565 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37571 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37574 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37575 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37583 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37584 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37585 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37592 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37595 \begin_layout Subsection
37596 Using the thesaurus
37599 \begin_layout Standard
37600 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37602 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37605 or the toolbar button
37608 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37611 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37613 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37615 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37616 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37617 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37626 ), related terms (such as
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37638 ), compounds (such as
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37650 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37659 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37663 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37664 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37670 the dictionary, such as the above
37674 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37679 \begin_inset space \space{}
37682 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37683 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37684 For example, looking up the word form
37688 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37693 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37698 \begin_inset space \space{}
37709 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37710 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37711 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37714 \begin_layout Section
37716 \begin_inset Index idx
37719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37726 \begin_inset Index idx
37729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 Document ! Change Tracking
37736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37738 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37747 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37748 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37749 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 \begin_inset space ~
37756 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37758 \begin_inset space ~
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37781 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37782 You can change the color in
37784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37785 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37796 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37802 \begin_inset Index idx
37805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 Color ! Change tracking
37811 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37812 's status bar when the
37813 cursor is in changed text.
37814 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37817 arg "changes-merge"
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37826 \begin_inset Index idx
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 \begin_inset Graphics
37847 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 \begin_inset Tabular
37875 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37876 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37877 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37878 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37888 arg "changes-track"
37896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37904 \begin_inset space ~
37907 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37927 arg "changes-output"
37935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37943 \begin_inset space ~
37946 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 Jumps to the next change
37992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38001 arg "change-accept"
38009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38020 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 arg "change-reject"
38048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38059 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38061 \begin_inset space ~
38070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 arg "changes-merge"
38087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38095 \begin_inset space ~
38098 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38118 arg "all-changes-accept"
38126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38137 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38161 arg "all-changes-reject"
38169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38180 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38182 \begin_inset space ~
38186 \begin_inset space ~
38195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38219 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38271 \begin_layout Standard
38272 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38278 \begin_layout Standard
38279 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38300 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38301 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38302 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38303 the next change after the current cursor position.
38304 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38305 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38306 step to the next change.
38307 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38310 \begin_layout Standard
38311 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38312 to describe a change.
38315 \begin_layout Standard
38317 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38318 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38324 \begin_inset Index idx
38327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38335 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38344 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38350 \begin_layout Section
38351 Comparison of Documents
38352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38354 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38359 \begin_inset Index idx
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38363 Comparison of documents
38371 \begin_layout Standard
38372 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38375 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38379 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38380 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38382 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38384 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38417 \begin_inset space ~
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38425 \begin_inset space ~
38430 enables the change tracking option
38433 \begin_inset space ~
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38446 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38449 \begin_layout Section
38450 International Support
38451 \begin_inset Index idx
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38455 International support
38463 \begin_layout Standard
38464 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38465 with any language you want.
38466 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38467 up \SpecialChar LyX
38469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38471 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38479 \begin_layout Standard
38480 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38481 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38482 \begin_inset space ~
38486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38488 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38495 \begin_layout Subsection
38497 \begin_inset Index idx
38500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 \begin_inset Index idx
38510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 Document ! Settings
38517 \begin_inset Index idx
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38521 Document ! Language
38529 \begin_layout Standard
38532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38533 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38536 dialog lets you set
38538 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38543 \begin_layout Standard
38548 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38558 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38559 For details about the different encoding options see section
38560 \begin_inset space ~
38564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38566 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38573 \begin_layout Subsection
38574 Keyboard mapping configuration
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38577 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38585 If you have for example a U.
38586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38589 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38590 can use an alternate keymap.
38591 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38597 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38598 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38601 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38602 \begin_inset space ~
38606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38608 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38613 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38614 which one you want to use.
38617 \begin_layout Standard
38618 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38619 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38620 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38624 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38625 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38626 one to support the characters you want.
38627 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38634 \begin_layout Chapter
38637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38639 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38646 \begin_layout Standard
38647 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38648 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38649 topic inside the user's guide.
38652 \begin_layout Section
38654 \begin_inset Index idx
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 \begin_layout Standard
38671 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38674 \begin_layout Subsection
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 Creates a new document.
38682 \begin_layout Subsection
38686 \begin_layout Standard
38687 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38688 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38689 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38691 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38692 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38698 \begin_layout Subsection
38702 \begin_layout Standard
38706 \begin_layout Subsection
38710 \begin_layout Standard
38711 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38712 Click there on a file to open it.
38715 \begin_layout Subsection
38717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38721 \begin_layout Standard
38723 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38724 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38728 \begin_layout Subsection
38732 \begin_layout Standard
38733 Closes the current document.
38736 \begin_layout Subsection
38740 \begin_layout Standard
38741 Closes all opened documents.
38744 \begin_layout Subsection
38748 \begin_layout Standard
38749 Saves the actual document.
38752 \begin_layout Subsection
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38757 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38758 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38762 \begin_layout Subsection
38764 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38768 \begin_layout Standard
38770 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38771 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38777 \begin_layout Subsection
38781 \begin_layout Standard
38782 Saves all opened documents.
38785 \begin_layout Subsection
38789 \begin_layout Standard
38790 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38793 \begin_layout Subsection
38797 \begin_layout Standard
38798 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38799 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38800 It is described in the section
38802 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38807 Additional Features
38812 \begin_layout Subsection
38816 \begin_layout Standard
38817 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38818 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38820 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38821 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38825 \begin_layout Standard
38826 When using the menu entry
38829 \begin_inset space ~
38834 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38838 \begin_inset space ~
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38851 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38852 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38855 \begin_layout Subsection
38857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38859 name "subsec:Export"
38866 \begin_layout Standard
38867 You can export your document to various file formats.
38868 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38870 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38871 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38872 during its configuration.
38875 \begin_layout Standard
38876 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38878 \begin_inset space ~
38882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38884 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38891 \begin_layout Description
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38900 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38905 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38906 \begin_inset Newline newline
38909 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38910 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38914 \begin_layout Description
38915 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38921 \begin_layout Description
38923 \begin_inset space ~
38926 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38932 \begin_layout Description
38933 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38934 's native DVI-format.
38935 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38936 files paths or file names in your document.
38938 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38945 \begin_layout Description
38946 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38947 in files paths or file names
38950 \begin_layout Description
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38959 ) DVI-format using the program
38961 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38964 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38976 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38984 \begin_layout Description
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38989 (cropped) the same as
38993 but with cropped page margins.
38996 \begin_layout Description
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39001 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39005 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39010 \begin_layout Description
39014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39022 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39030 \begin_layout Description
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39039 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39043 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39051 \begin_layout Description
39055 \begin_inset space ~
39064 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39065 source that is compilable with the program
39067 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39071 \begin_layout Description
39075 \begin_inset space ~
39080 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39081 source, additionally all images used in the document
39082 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39086 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39089 \begin_layout Description
39093 \begin_inset space ~
39098 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39099 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39100 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39108 \begin_layout Description
39112 \begin_inset space ~
39121 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39122 source that is compilable with the program
39128 \begin_layout Description
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39141 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39142 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39148 \begin_layout Description
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39153 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39154 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39160 \begin_inset space \space{}
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39184 represent the version number)
39187 \begin_layout Description
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39196 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39197 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39198 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39202 \begin_layout Description
39203 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39204 's internal XHTML engine
39207 \begin_layout Description
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39224 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39229 For the conversion the program
39238 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39241 \begin_layout Description
39242 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39247 \begin_layout Description
39249 \begin_inset space ~
39252 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39254 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39257 For the conversion the program
39266 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39269 \begin_layout Description
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39274 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39275 For the conversion the program
39284 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39287 \begin_layout Description
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39292 (cropped) the same as
39295 \begin_inset space ~
39300 but with cropped page margins
39303 \begin_layout Description
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39312 PDF-format using the program
39316 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39319 \begin_layout Description
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39340 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39345 \begin_inset space \space{}
39348 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39352 \begin_layout Description
39356 \begin_inset space ~
39361 PDF-format using the program
39363 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39366 , produces PDF-files directly
39369 \begin_layout Description
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39378 PDF-format using the program
39382 , produces PDF-files directly
39385 \begin_layout Description
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39394 PDF-format using the program
39398 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39401 \begin_layout Description
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39410 PDF-format using the program
39415 , produces PDF-files directly
39418 \begin_layout Description
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39430 \begin_layout Description
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39443 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39444 and then exported as text using the program
39449 \begin_layout Description
39454 PostScript format using the program
39462 options see section
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39469 reference "subsec:General-output"
39476 \begin_layout Description
39477 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39478 source and also code in the statistical programming
39492 it is possible to use
39496 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39501 If one of the menu entries
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39517 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39519 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39527 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39532 \begin_inset Index idx
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39545 \begin_layout Subsection
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39550 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39551 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39560 reference "sec:Paths"
39565 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39574 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39575 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39576 's preferences as described in section
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39583 reference "subsec:Converters"
39590 \begin_layout Subsection
39591 New and Close Window
39594 \begin_layout Standard
39595 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39599 \begin_layout Subsection
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39604 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39607 \begin_layout Section
39609 \begin_inset Index idx
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39621 \begin_layout Subsection
39625 \begin_layout Standard
39626 Described in section
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39633 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39640 \begin_layout Subsection
39641 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39644 \begin_layout Standard
39645 Described in section
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39652 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39659 \begin_layout Subsection
39663 \begin_layout Standard
39664 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39665 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39668 \begin_layout Subsection
39672 \begin_layout Standard
39673 Selects the whole document.
39676 \begin_layout Subsection
39677 Find & Replace (Quick)
39680 \begin_layout Standard
39681 Described in section
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39688 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39695 \begin_layout Subsection
39696 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39699 \begin_layout Standard
39700 Described in section
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39707 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39714 \begin_layout Subsection
39715 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39718 \begin_layout Standard
39719 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39723 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39729 \begin_layout Standard
39731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39732 Described in section
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39739 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39748 \begin_layout Subsection
39750 \begin_inset Index idx
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 Paragraph ! Settings
39762 \begin_layout Standard
39763 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39764 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39768 \begin_layout Standard
39769 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39770 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39777 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39789 \begin_layout Subsection
39791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39798 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39803 \begin_layout Enumerate
39805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39806 Customize text properties by means of the
39812 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39815 ; this is described in section
39816 \begin_inset space ~
39820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39822 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39829 \begin_layout Enumerate
39831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39832 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39834 Apply last settings
39837 \begin_layout Enumerate
39839 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39840 Change the casing of selected text (
39855 \begin_layout Subsection
39857 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39861 \begin_layout Standard
39863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39864 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39865 text styles (in the case of this document:
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39893 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39902 \begin_layout Subsection
39903 Table and Rows & Columns
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39908 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39909 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39912 \begin_layout Subsection
39916 \begin_layout Standard
39917 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39918 It will dissolve this inset.
39919 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39923 \begin_layout Subsection
39927 \begin_layout Standard
39928 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39929 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39932 \begin_layout Subsection
39933 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39936 \begin_layout Standard
39937 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39939 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39946 reference "sec:Nesting"
39951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39953 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39960 \begin_layout Section
39962 \begin_inset Index idx
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 \begin_layout Standard
39975 At the bottom of the
39979 menu the opened documents are listed.
39982 \begin_layout Subsection
39983 Open/Close all Insets
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39987 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39990 \begin_layout Subsection
39991 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39995 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39998 \begin_layout Standard
39999 Math macros are described in the
40006 \begin_layout Subsection
40010 \begin_layout Standard
40011 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40018 reference "sec:Navigating"
40023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40025 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40032 \begin_layout Subsection
40036 \begin_layout Standard
40037 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40045 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40052 \begin_layout Subsection
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40057 Opens a window showing console messages.
40058 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40063 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40064 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40065 is processing the document.
40068 \begin_layout Subsection
40070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40072 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40077 \begin_inset Index idx
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40092 All toolbars and the
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40100 can be turned on and off.
40105 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40134 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40138 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40145 \begin_layout Standard
40150 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40154 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40155 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40156 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40157 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40158 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40161 \begin_layout Standard
40163 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40170 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40177 \begin_layout Subsection
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40205 \begin_inset space ~
40210 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40211 's main window vertically while
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40239 will split it horizontally.
40240 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40241 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40242 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40243 three or more documents at the same time.
40244 To close a split view, use the menu
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_layout Subsection
40263 \begin_layout Standard
40264 Closes a split view.
40267 \begin_layout Subsection
40271 \begin_layout Standard
40272 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40273 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40274 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40275 's main window fullscreen.
40276 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40277 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40280 \begin_layout Section
40282 \begin_inset Index idx
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 \begin_layout Subsection
40298 \begin_layout Standard
40299 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40306 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40317 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40321 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40328 \begin_layout Standard
40329 Here you can insert the following characters:
40332 \begin_layout Description
40337 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40340 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40341 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 -packages you have installed.
40343 You can get a complete display by checking
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset Newline newline
40356 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40364 Not all characters will be visible in the
40368 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40369 dialog (see section
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40376 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40380 ) can display every character.
40388 \begin_layout Description
40389 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40393 \begin_layout Description
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40402 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40416 \begin_layout Description
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40421 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40431 \begin_layout Description
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40436 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40446 \begin_layout Description
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40451 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40455 \begin_layout Description
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40460 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40469 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40475 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40481 \begin_layout Description
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40486 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40490 \begin_layout Description
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset Index idx
40499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 \begin_inset Index idx
40509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40510 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40515 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40516 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40518 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40524 \begin_inset Index idx
40527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 \begin_inset Newline newline
40538 More information about this feature can be found in the
40544 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40550 \begin_layout Description
40551 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40553 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40554 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40558 \begin_layout Subsection
40562 \begin_layout Standard
40563 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40566 \begin_layout Description
40567 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40568 \begin_inset script superscript
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40579 \begin_layout Description
40580 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40581 \begin_inset script subscript
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40592 \begin_layout Description
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40597 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40604 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40611 \begin_layout Description
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40616 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40617 \begin_inset space ~
40621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40623 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40630 \begin_layout Description
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40635 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40642 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40649 \begin_layout Description
40651 \begin_inset space ~
40654 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40660 \begin_inset space \space{}
40663 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40664 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40673 To insert a fraction use the command
40678 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40682 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40691 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40698 \begin_layout Description
40700 \begin_inset space ~
40703 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40710 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40717 \begin_layout Description
40719 \begin_inset space ~
40722 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40729 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40736 \begin_layout Description
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40741 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40748 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40755 \begin_layout Description
40756 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40770 \begin_layout Description
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40775 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40782 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40789 \begin_layout Description
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40794 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40808 \begin_layout Description
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40817 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40826 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40833 for a usage example.
40836 \begin_layout Description
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40845 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40852 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40859 \begin_layout Description
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40864 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40865 as described in section
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40872 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40879 \begin_layout Description
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40891 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40898 \begin_layout Description
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40904 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40912 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40919 \begin_layout Description
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40924 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40931 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40938 \begin_layout Description
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40954 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40961 \begin_layout Subsection
40963 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40967 \begin_layout Standard
40969 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40970 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40971 The submenu allows you to insert
40974 \begin_layout Description
40976 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40981 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40984 \begin_layout Description
40986 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40995 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40999 \begin_layout Description
41001 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41006 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41016 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41019 \begin_layout Description
41021 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41030 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41034 \begin_layout Description
41036 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41041 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41044 \begin_layout Description
41046 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41059 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41062 \begin_layout Description
41064 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41066 \begin_inset space ~
41069 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41072 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41078 \begin_layout Description
41080 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41085 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41088 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41094 \begin_layout Description
41096 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41097 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41098 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41099 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41102 \begin_layout Subsection
41105 List/Contents/References
41108 \begin_layout Standard
41109 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41134 are described in section
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41141 reference "sec:toc"
41150 is described in section
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41157 reference "sec:Index"
41165 is described in section
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41172 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41178 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41181 is described in section
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41188 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41195 \begin_layout Subsection
41199 \begin_layout Standard
41200 To insert floats, as described in section
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41207 reference "sec:Floats"
41211 and in detail the chapter
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_layout Subsection
41230 \begin_layout Standard
41231 To insert notes, described in section
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41238 reference "sec:Notes"
41245 \begin_layout Subsection
41249 \begin_layout Standard
41250 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41252 Branches are described in section
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41259 reference "sec:Branches"
41266 \begin_layout Subsection
41270 \begin_layout Standard
41271 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41272 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41274 An example is the document class
41275 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41285 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41294 with three custom insets.
41297 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41301 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41307 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41310 \begin_layout Subsection
41312 \begin_inset Index idx
41315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41324 \begin_layout Standard
41325 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41327 For more information see chapter
41329 External Document Parts
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41338 \begin_layout Subsection
41340 \begin_inset Index idx
41343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41352 \begin_layout Standard
41353 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41354 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_layout Subsection
41373 \begin_layout Standard
41378 dialog as described in section
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41385 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41392 \begin_layout Subsection
41396 \begin_layout Standard
41401 as described in section
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41408 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41415 \begin_layout Subsection
41419 \begin_layout Standard
41424 as described in section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41431 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41438 \begin_layout Subsection
41440 \begin_inset Index idx
41443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 \begin_inset Index idx
41453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41454 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41462 \begin_layout Standard
41463 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41464 Floats are described in section
41465 \begin_inset space ~
41469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41471 reference "sec:Floats"
41475 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41477 Multi-page Captions
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_layout Subsection
41494 \begin_layout Standard
41495 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41502 reference "sec:Index"
41509 \begin_layout Subsection
41513 \begin_layout Standard
41514 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41528 \begin_layout Subsection
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41533 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41534 Tables are described in section
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41541 reference "sec:Tables"
41545 and in detail in the chapter
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_layout Subsection
41564 \begin_layout Standard
41570 Graphics are described in section
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41577 reference "sec:Graphics"
41584 \begin_layout Subsection
41588 \begin_layout Standard
41589 Inserts a URL as described in section
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41596 reference "subsec:URLs"
41603 \begin_layout Subsection
41607 \begin_layout Standard
41608 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41615 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41622 \begin_layout Subsection
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41634 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41641 \begin_layout Subsection
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41646 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41653 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41660 \begin_layout Subsection
41663 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41667 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41668 environments of the same type.
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41676 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41680 for an explanation.
41683 \begin_layout Subsection
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41689 title or caption of a float.
41690 Inserts a short title as described in section
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41697 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41704 \begin_layout Subsection
41709 \begin_layout Standard
41710 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41711 Code box as described in section
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41718 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41725 \begin_layout Subsection
41727 \begin_inset Index idx
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 \begin_layout Standard
41740 Inserts a program listings box.
41741 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41743 Program Code Listings
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41756 \begin_layout Subsection
41758 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41762 \begin_layout Standard
41764 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41765 Inserts the actual date.
41766 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41773 \begin_layout Subsection
41777 \begin_layout Standard
41778 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41785 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41792 \begin_layout Section
41794 \begin_inset Index idx
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 \begin_layout Standard
41807 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41811 of the current document.
41812 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41815 \begin_layout Subsection
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41821 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41822 to jump, for example, between section
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41827 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41831 2.5 and use the submenu
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41861 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41865 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41871 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41874 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41877 \begin_layout Standard
41878 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41887 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41895 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41898 \begin_layout Subsection
41899 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41907 \begin_layout Subsection
41911 \begin_layout Standard
41912 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41913 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41914 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_layout Subsection
41934 \begin_layout Standard
41935 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41938 The \SpecialChar LyX
41939 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41954 manual for a detailed description.
41957 \begin_layout Section
41959 \begin_inset Index idx
41962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41971 \begin_layout Subsection
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 Change Tracking is described in section
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41983 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41990 \begin_layout Subsection
41998 \begin_layout Standard
41999 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42000 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42001 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42003 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42004 to the clipboard or update the view.
42005 \begin_inset Newline newline
42008 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42012 \begin_layout Standard
42015 Open Containing Directory
42017 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42018 's temporary folder for the document.
42019 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42020 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42021 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42022 For example some journals require to send the
42026 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42030 \begin_layout Subsection
42031 Start Appendix Here
42034 \begin_layout Standard
42035 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42036 as described in section
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42043 reference "sec:Appendices"
42050 \begin_layout Subsection
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42058 \begin_layout Standard
42059 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42060 default output format for the document (menu
42062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42064 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42066 \begin_inset space ~
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42082 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42086 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42089 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42090 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42095 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42097 \begin_inset space ~
42100 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42102 \begin_inset space ~
42106 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42118 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42122 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42123 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42131 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42133 \begin_inset space ~
42136 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42146 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42151 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42152 when it is first configured.
42153 The default output format is
42156 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_layout Subsection
42165 View (Other Formats)
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42170 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42171 actual document with an external program.
42172 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42173 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42174 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42176 All possible formats are listed in section
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42183 reference "subsec:Export"
42188 You should at least see the menu entry
42193 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42195 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42197 \begin_inset space ~
42201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42203 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42208 \begin_inset Index idx
42211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42212 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42221 \begin_layout Standard
42222 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42223 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42225 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42226 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42231 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42236 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42246 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42251 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42252 when it is first configured.
42255 \begin_layout Subsection
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42263 \begin_layout Standard
42264 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42265 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42268 \begin_layout Subsection
42269 Update (Other Formats)
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42274 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42277 \begin_layout Subsection
42278 View Master Document
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42282 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42303 manual for more information on this topic).
42304 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42305 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_inset space ~
42318 generates the output of the whole book, while
42322 will just output the chapter alone.
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42326 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42327 in the document settings (menu
42329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42331 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42333 \begin_inset space ~
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42349 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42353 ) or in the preferences (menu
42355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42356 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42361 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42366 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset space ~
42382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42384 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42391 \begin_layout Subsection
42392 Update Master Document
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42396 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42417 manual for more information on this topic).
42418 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42419 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42424 in the document settings (menu
42426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42427 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42446 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42450 ) or in the preferences (menu
42452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42455 \begin_inset space ~
42458 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42463 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42465 \begin_inset space ~
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42481 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42488 \begin_layout Subsection
42490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42492 name "subsec:Compressed"
42499 \begin_layout Standard
42500 Un/compresses the current document.
42501 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42502 compression (see the
42504 Additional Features
42506 manual for details).
42509 \begin_layout Subsection
42513 \begin_layout Standard
42514 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42517 \begin_layout Subsection
42521 \begin_layout Standard
42522 The document settings are described in appendix
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42529 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42536 \begin_layout Section
42538 \begin_inset Index idx
42541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42550 \begin_layout Subsection
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 Spell checking is explained in section
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42562 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42569 \begin_layout Subsection
42573 \begin_layout Standard
42574 The thesaurus is described in section
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42581 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42588 \begin_layout Subsection
42590 \begin_inset Index idx
42593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42600 \begin_inset Index idx
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42612 \begin_layout Standard
42613 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42614 the highlighted document part.
42617 \begin_layout Subsection
42623 \begin_inset Index idx
42626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42627 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 Generates with the help of the program
42639 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42642 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42643 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42644 This feature is not available on Windows.
42647 \begin_layout Subsection
42653 \begin_inset Index idx
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42672 \begin_inset space ~
42677 to see the full filename paths.
42680 \begin_layout Subsection
42682 \begin_inset Index idx
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42695 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42696 files as described in section
42697 \begin_inset space ~
42701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42703 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42710 \begin_layout Subsection
42712 \begin_inset Index idx
42715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42728 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42746 \begin_inset Index idx
42749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42760 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42761 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42762 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42763 -packages and programs it needs; see
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42771 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42778 \begin_layout Subsection
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42787 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42794 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42801 \begin_layout Section
42803 \begin_inset Index idx
42806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42817 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42819 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42832 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42833 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42834 packages and classes found
42835 by \SpecialChar LyX
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42843 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42850 \begin_layout Standard
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42859 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42864 \begin_layout Section
42866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42868 name "sec:Toolbars"
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42883 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42891 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42892 This is described in the
42894 Additional Features
42899 \begin_layout Subsection
42901 \begin_inset Index idx
42904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42913 \begin_layout Standard
42914 \begin_inset Graphics
42915 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42924 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42931 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42948 \begin_inset Note Note
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42952 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42957 manual for more information.
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42966 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42973 \begin_inset Tabular
42974 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42975 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42977 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 \begin_inset Graphics
42984 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 pull-down box for the environments
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43012 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43020 \begin_inset Tabular
43021 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43022 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43023 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43078 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43124 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43138 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43154 arg "spelling-continuously"
43162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43166 Spellcheck continuously
43172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43317 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43322 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43340 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43422 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43436 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43437 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43465 Emphasize text, function of the
43466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43474 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43482 arg "dialog-show character"
43493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 Set text to noun style, function of the
43515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43518 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43523 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43525 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43531 arg "dialog-show character"
43542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43548 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43551 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43564 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43580 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43585 arg "textstyle-apply"
43595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43600 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43601 Format text using the current settings in the
43603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43605 \begin_inset space ~
43608 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43643 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43691 arg "tabular-insert"
43699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43718 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43721 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43734 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43753 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 Toggle outline window on/off,
43767 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43783 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43795 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43810 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43822 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43835 \begin_layout Subsection
43837 \begin_inset Index idx
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 \begin_layout Standard
43850 \begin_inset Graphics
43851 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43859 \begin_layout Standard
43860 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43866 \begin_layout Standard
43867 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43871 \begin_layout Standard
43872 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43878 \begin_layout Standard
43879 \begin_inset Tabular
43880 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43881 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43882 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43883 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
43928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43947 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
43955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43974 arg "layout-toggle List"
43982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 arg "depth-increment"
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44042 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 arg "depth-decrement"
44074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44104 arg "float-insert figure"
44112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44119 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44135 arg "float-insert table"
44143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44150 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44226 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 arg "nomencl-insert"
44298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 arg "footnote-insert"
44332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44403 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44517 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44532 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44563 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 arg "dialog-show character"
44591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44602 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44615 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44620 arg "textstyle-apply"
44628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44633 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44634 Format text using the recent settings in the
44637 arg "dialog-show character"
44646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44655 arg "layout-paragraph"
44663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44717 \begin_layout Subsection
44718 View/Update Toolbar
44719 \begin_inset Index idx
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44723 Toolbar ! View / Update
44731 \begin_layout Standard
44732 \begin_inset Graphics
44733 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44740 \begin_layout Standard
44741 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44747 \begin_layout Standard
44748 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44752 \begin_layout Standard
44753 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44759 \begin_layout Standard
44760 \begin_inset Tabular
44761 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44762 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44763 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44764 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 arg "buffer-update"
44812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 arg "master-buffer-view"
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44859 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44868 arg "master-buffer-update"
44876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44888 \begin_inset space ~
44897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44906 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44921 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44922 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44923 Synchronize with Output
44929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44940 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44957 View (Other Formats)
44963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44970 arg "update-others"
44974 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44989 Update (Other Formats)
45002 \begin_layout Standard
45004 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45005 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45011 \begin_layout Subsection
45015 \begin_layout Standard
45016 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45023 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45027 , the table toolbar
45028 \begin_inset Index idx
45031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45045 manual and the math macro toolbar
45046 \begin_inset Index idx
45049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45062 \begin_layout Chapter
45063 The Document Settings
45064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45066 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45071 \begin_inset Index idx
45074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 Document ! Settings
45083 \begin_layout Standard
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45092 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45093 is called with the menu
45095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45099 You can save your document settings as default with the
45101 Save as Document Defaults
45103 button in any dialog.
45104 This will create a template named
45108 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45109 when you create a new document without
45113 \begin_layout Standard
45118 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45119 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45122 \begin_layout Standard
45123 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45124 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45125 to find the one you are looking for.
45126 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45127 the submenus of the dialog.
45129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45133 \begin_inset space \space{}
45137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45144 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45145 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45146 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45149 \begin_layout Section
45153 \begin_layout Standard
45154 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45156 Document classes are described in section
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45163 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45171 \begin_layout Standard
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45180 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45185 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45186 as a layout for a document class.
45187 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45189 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45198 \begin_layout Standard
45199 Some classes use special class options by default.
45200 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45204 and you can decide to use them or not.
45205 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45206 recommended you leave them untouched.
45211 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45212 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45217 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45219 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45225 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45226 \begin_inset Newline newline
45231 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45234 \begin_inset Newline newline
45237 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45238 distribution, see section
45243 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45245 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45258 \begin_layout Standard
45263 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45264 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45265 in the background if the child document
45266 is opened without its master.
45267 This way child documents are always compilable.
45268 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45284 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45295 \begin_inset Index idx
45298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 packages ! prettyref
45306 \begin_inset Index idx
45309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45311 packages ! refstyle
45316 for cross-references, see section
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45323 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45330 \begin_layout Section
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45336 Please refer to the section
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45352 manual for details.
45355 \begin_layout Section
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45360 Modules are explained in section
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45367 reference "subsec:Modules"
45374 \begin_layout Section
45378 \begin_layout Standard
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45386 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45393 \begin_layout Section
45397 \begin_layout Standard
45398 The document font settings are described in section
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45405 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45412 \begin_layout Section
45416 \begin_layout Standard
45417 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45434 and whether it should be a
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45442 can also be specified here.
45445 \begin_layout Standard
45446 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45447 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45448 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45450 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45453 \begin_layout Standard
45456 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45459 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45460 justifies the text on screen.
45461 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45463 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45467 \begin_layout Standard
45469 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45478 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45483 \begin_layout Section
45487 \begin_layout Standard
45488 This dialog is described in sections
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45495 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45502 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45509 \begin_layout Section
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45514 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45521 reference "subsec:Margins"
45528 \begin_layout Section
45530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45532 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45537 \begin_inset Index idx
45540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45541 Language ! Encoding
45549 \begin_layout Standard
45550 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45551 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45552 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45554 is always encoded in utf8).
45555 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45556 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45557 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45558 -command is not known for
45559 a particular character).
45560 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45564 \begin_layout Standard
45566 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45567 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45568 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45569 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45570 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45571 's default encoding).
45572 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45573 's Unicode support covers the
45574 characters of most scripts.
45575 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45576 using one of the traditional, or
45577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45584 , encodings is necessary.
45587 \begin_layout Standard
45589 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45591 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45594 Traditional (auto-selected)
45600 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45601 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45602 the given language(s).
45604 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45610 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45611 If you use the option
45616 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45619 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45620 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45623 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45626 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45627 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45628 exactly one encoding.
45629 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45634 \begin_layout Standard
45636 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45637 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45643 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45644 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45648 \begin_layout Standard
45650 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45651 Finally, you can also select
45655 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45656 Note that this encoding is then used for
45661 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45662 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45666 \begin_layout Standard
45668 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45671 Do not load inputenc
45673 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45674 from automatically loading the
45681 \begin_inset Index idx
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45688 packages ! inputenc
45694 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45695 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45696 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45697 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45698 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45700 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45706 Traditional (auto-selected)
45713 \begin_layout Standard
45715 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45717 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45718 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45719 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45720 installation supports Unicode), choose
45721 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45722 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45723 is quite incomplete, so
45724 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45729 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45730 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45731 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45732 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45733 -commands is not used, because all
45734 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45735 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45736 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45737 , two new alternative engines
45738 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45740 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45742 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45745 \begin_inset space ~
45753 \begin_inset space ~
45761 \begin_inset space ~
45767 \begin_inset space ~
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45773 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45778 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45782 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45787 \begin_layout Standard
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45796 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45797 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45807 The possible settings are:
45810 \begin_layout Description
45811 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45824 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45831 \begin_layout Description
45832 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45833 format you will use.
45834 In many cases this will be
45839 \begin_inset Index idx
45842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 If the newer package
45855 \begin_inset Index idx
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 packages ! polyglossia
45865 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45866 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45867 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45869 this package will be used instead of
45876 \begin_layout Description
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45889 would be more appropriate.
45892 \begin_layout Description
45893 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45894 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45898 (for German texts), type in
45901 \begin_inset Newline newline
45906 usepackage{ngerman}
45909 \begin_layout Description
45910 None will not use a language package.
45911 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45914 \begin_layout Standard
45915 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45918 \begin_layout Description
45920 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset space ~
45930 \begin_inset space ~
45937 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45943 \begin_inset Index idx
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 packages ! inputenc
45954 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45955 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45956 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45962 \begin_layout Description
45963 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45965 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45966 commands, which may result in a big
45967 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45968 -commands are needed.
45970 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45971 This is the same as the
45984 \begin_layout Description
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45993 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45996 \begin_layout Description
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46005 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46008 \begin_layout Description
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46013 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46016 \begin_layout Description
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46025 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46026 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46029 \begin_layout Description
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46038 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46042 \begin_layout Description
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46048 \begin_inset space ~
46051 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46052 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46055 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46068 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46069 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_layout Description
46077 \begin_inset space ~
46081 \begin_inset space ~
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46088 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46089 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46092 \begin_layout Description
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46101 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46102 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46103 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46104 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46105 \begin_inset space ~
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46115 \begin_layout Description
46117 \begin_inset space ~
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46124 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46125 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46126 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46128 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46129 \begin_inset space ~
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46139 \begin_layout Description
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46148 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46151 \begin_layout Description
46153 \begin_inset space ~
46157 \begin_inset space ~
46160 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46163 \begin_layout Description
46165 \begin_inset space ~
46169 \begin_inset space ~
46172 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46175 \begin_layout Description
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46180 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46183 \begin_layout Description
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46188 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46191 \begin_layout Description
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46197 \begin_inset space ~
46200 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46203 \begin_layout Description
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46215 \begin_layout Description
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46221 \begin_inset space ~
46224 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46227 \begin_layout Description
46229 \begin_inset space ~
46233 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_layout Description
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46248 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46254 \begin_inset Index idx
46257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 , when using this, set the document language to
46269 \begin_layout Description
46271 \begin_inset space ~
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46278 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46283 , when using this, set the document language to
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46292 \begin_layout Description
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46301 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46307 \begin_inset Index idx
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 packages ! japanese
46317 , when using this, set the document language to
46322 \begin_layout Description
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46328 \begin_inset space ~
46331 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46336 , when using this, set the document language to
46341 \begin_layout Description
46343 \begin_inset space ~
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46350 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46355 , when using this, set the document language to
46360 \begin_layout Description
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46365 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46368 \begin_layout Description
46370 \begin_inset space ~
46374 \begin_inset space ~
46378 \begin_inset space ~
46381 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46384 \begin_layout Description
46386 \begin_inset space ~
46390 \begin_inset space ~
46394 \begin_inset space ~
46397 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46398 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46399 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46402 \begin_layout Description
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46408 \begin_inset space ~
46414 \begin_layout Description
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46423 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46424 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46427 \begin_layout Description
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46436 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46442 \begin_inset Index idx
46445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46452 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46453 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46455 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46456 with the default encoding (
46458 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46464 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46465 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46470 \begin_layout Description
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46483 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46490 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46493 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46500 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46501 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46503 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46506 \begin_layout Description
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46515 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46521 \begin_inset Index idx
46524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46532 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46535 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46537 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46538 This used to be more comprehensive than
46541 \begin_inset space ~
46546 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46551 \begin_layout Description
46553 \begin_inset space ~
46556 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46562 \begin_inset Index idx
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46567 packages ! inputenc
46574 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46575 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46577 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46578 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46579 with the default encoding (
46581 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46587 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46588 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46593 \begin_layout Description
46595 \begin_inset space ~
46599 \begin_inset space ~
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46606 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46607 \begin_inset space ~
46613 \begin_layout Description
46615 \begin_inset space ~
46619 \begin_inset space ~
46623 \begin_inset space ~
46626 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46627 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46628 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46632 \begin_layout Description
46634 \begin_inset space ~
46638 \begin_inset space ~
46642 \begin_inset space ~
46645 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46646 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46649 \begin_layout Section
46651 \begin_inset Index idx
46654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 \begin_inset Index idx
46664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46671 \begin_inset Index idx
46674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46675 Color ! Shaded boxes
46681 \begin_inset Index idx
46684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46693 \begin_layout Standard
46694 Here you can alter the font color for the
46698 (default: black), for
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46706 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46710 (default: white) and for
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46723 sets the color back to the default.
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46727 Clicking any button showing
46735 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46736 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46737 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46738 later more quickly.
46741 \begin_layout Standard
46742 Note, if you change the
46745 \begin_inset space ~
46750 font color and use the option
46753 \begin_inset space ~
46758 in the document settings under
46761 \begin_inset space ~
46766 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46767 \begin_inset space ~
46771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46773 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46780 \begin_layout Standard
46781 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46787 \begin_layout Standard
46791 \begin_inset space ~
46800 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46803 \begin_inset space ~
46806 Code after a forced page break:
46809 \begin_layout Itemize
46810 For the page color:
46811 \begin_inset Newline newline
46818 pagecolor{color name}
46821 \begin_layout Itemize
46822 For the text color:
46823 \begin_inset Newline newline
46833 \begin_layout Standard
46834 You are restricted to one of
46870 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46883 \begin_inset Newline newline
46886 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46887 names to refer to them:
46890 \begin_layout Itemize
46896 \begin_inset Newline newline
46901 page_backgroundcolor
46904 \begin_layout Itemize
46908 \begin_inset space ~
46914 \begin_inset Newline newline
46922 \begin_layout Itemize
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46932 \begin_inset Newline newline
46940 \begin_layout Itemize
46944 \begin_inset space ~
46950 \begin_inset Newline newline
46958 \begin_layout Standard
46959 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46962 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46978 \begin_layout Section
46980 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46984 \begin_layout Standard
46986 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46987 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46988 \begin_inset space ~
46992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46994 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47002 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47003 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47006 \begin_layout Standard
47008 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47009 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47011 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47014 \begin_layout Section
47018 \begin_layout Standard
47019 Here you can adjust the
47023 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47027 as described in section
47028 \begin_inset space ~
47032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47034 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47039 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47045 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47046 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47048 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47049 of this package can be used as well.
47050 The most common one are:
47053 \begin_layout Description
47055 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47056 right Line numbers to the right margin
47059 \begin_layout Description
47061 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47062 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47066 \begin_layout Description
47068 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47069 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47072 \begin_layout Description
47074 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47075 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47078 \begin_layout Description
47080 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47085 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47090 \begin_layout Section
47094 \begin_layout Standard
47095 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47101 \begin_inset Index idx
47104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47106 packages ! biblatex
47116 \begin_inset Index idx
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47131 \begin_inset Index idx
47134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47142 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47145 Sectioned bibliography
47147 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47153 \begin_inset Index idx
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47158 packages ! bibtopic
47168 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47169 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47173 for the generation of the bibliography.
47174 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47175 \begin_inset space ~
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47181 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47188 \begin_layout Section
47192 \begin_layout Standard
47193 Here you can define the
47197 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47205 reference "sec:Index"
47212 \begin_layout Section
47216 \begin_layout Standard
47217 The PDF properties are explained in section
47218 \begin_inset space ~
47222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47224 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47231 \begin_layout Section
47235 \begin_layout Standard
47236 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47237 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47243 \begin_inset Index idx
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47273 \begin_inset Index idx
47276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47288 \begin_inset Index idx
47291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47303 \begin_inset Index idx
47306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47308 packages ! mathdots
47318 \begin_inset Index idx
47321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47323 packages ! mathtools
47333 \begin_inset Index idx
47336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47348 \begin_inset Index idx
47351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47353 packages ! stackrel
47363 \begin_inset Index idx
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47368 packages ! stmaryrd
47378 \begin_inset Index idx
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 packages ! undertilde
47388 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47391 \begin_layout Description
47392 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47393 -errors in formulas,
47394 ensure that you have this enabled.
47397 \begin_layout Description
47398 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47399 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47400 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47404 \begin_layout Description
47405 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47420 \begin_layout Description
47421 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47436 \begin_layout Description
47437 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47448 \begin_layout Description
47449 mathtools is used for the math commands
47485 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47492 \begin_layout Description
47493 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47495 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47504 \begin_layout Description
47505 stackrel is used for the math command
47522 \begin_layout Description
47523 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47526 \begin_layout Description
47527 undertilde is used for the math command
47535 Accents for one Character
47544 \begin_layout Section
47546 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47548 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47554 \begin_layout Standard
47556 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47557 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47560 \begin_layout Standard
47562 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47563 The float placement options
47564 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47567 are described in the section
47570 \begin_inset space ~
47574 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47576 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47592 \begin_layout Section
47596 \begin_layout Standard
47597 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47599 Program Code Listings
47604 \begin_inset space ~
47612 \begin_layout Section
47616 \begin_layout Standard
47617 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47625 set to be used and set the
47630 The itemize environment is described in section
47631 \begin_inset space ~
47635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47637 reference "sec:Itemize"
47644 \begin_layout Standard
47645 You can furthermore specify a
47648 \begin_inset space ~
47653 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47654 command of the desired character.
47655 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47662 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47668 \begin_inset space \space{}
47672 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47682 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47683 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47686 \begin_layout Standard
47687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47695 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47696 -packages in the preamble (menu
47699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47700 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47709 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47713 usepackage{textcomp}
47716 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47720 usepackage{amssymb}
47730 \begin_layout Section
47734 \begin_layout Standard
47735 Branches are described in section
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47742 reference "sec:Branches"
47749 \begin_layout Section
47751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47753 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47761 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47764 \begin_layout Description
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47773 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47793 View Master Document
47794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47801 Update Master Document
47802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47809 menu or the toolbar.
47810 The default is set in
47812 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47813 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47818 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47828 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47835 \begin_layout Description
47837 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47839 \begin_inset space ~
47843 \begin_inset space ~
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47850 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47855 option which is needed with some packages.
47856 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47857 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47860 \begin_layout Description
47862 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47864 \begin_inset space ~
47868 \begin_inset space ~
47871 Options offers settings for the
47879 \begin_layout Itemize
47883 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47885 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47887 \begin_inset space ~
47893 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47895 \begin_inset space ~
47899 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47905 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47907 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47908 settings for the menu
47910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47918 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47921 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47922 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47927 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47929 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47931 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47934 or a detailed description see section
47936 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47941 \begin_inset space ~
47947 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
47951 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
47955 \begin_layout Itemize
47957 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
47960 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
47962 determines whether so-called
47963 \begin_inset Quotes els
47967 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47971 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
47973 \begin_inset Quotes els
47977 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47980 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47981 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
47982 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
47984 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
47986 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
47987 macros, you can uncheck this.
47988 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
47995 \begin_layout Description
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48004 Options offers settings for the export format
48012 \begin_inset space ~
48017 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48021 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48025 \begin_inset space ~
48030 settings are described in detail in section
48032 Math Output in XHTML
48037 \begin_inset space ~
48046 \begin_inset space ~
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48055 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48058 \begin_layout Description
48060 \begin_inset space ~
48065 Save transient properties
48067 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48068 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48069 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48073 \begin_layout Itemize
48074 the activation of change tracking
48077 \begin_layout Itemize
48078 the output of tracked changes
48081 \begin_layout Itemize
48082 the recording of the document directory path.
48085 \begin_layout Standard
48086 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48087 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48091 \begin_layout Section
48099 \begin_layout Standard
48100 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48102 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48104 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48106 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48110 \begin_layout Standard
48111 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48112 -syntax is given in section
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48119 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48126 \begin_layout Chapter
48132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48134 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48139 \begin_inset Index idx
48142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48151 \begin_layout Standard
48152 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48154 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48158 It has the following submenus.
48161 \begin_layout Section
48165 \begin_layout Subsection
48169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48170 User Interface File
48171 \begin_inset Index idx
48174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48175 Customization ! of toolbars
48181 \begin_inset Index idx
48184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48185 Customization ! of menus
48193 \begin_layout Standard
48194 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48195 interface (ui) file.
48196 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48204 \begin_layout Description
48209 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48212 \begin_layout Description
48219 the menu entries in popup context menus
48222 \begin_layout Description
48227 specifies the toolbar buttons
48230 \begin_layout Standard
48231 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48232 and edit the entries.
48235 \begin_layout Standard
48236 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48248 entries must be finished with an explicit
48273 and in the case of the
48274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48286 The syntax for the entries is:
48289 \begin_layout Standard
48290 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48319 \begin_layout Standard
48321 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48324 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48325 -functions are listed in the menu
48327 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48337 \begin_layout Standard
48338 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48344 \begin_layout Standard
48345 For example, assuming you use the menu
48347 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48350 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48354 \begin_layout Standard
48355 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48379 \begin_layout Standard
48381 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48396 to have the sixth bookmark.
48399 \begin_layout Standard
48403 \begin_inset space ~
48408 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48409 's toolbar buttons.
48410 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48411 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48414 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48426 \begin_layout Standard
48429 Enable tool tips in main work area
48431 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48439 \begin_layout Standard
48444 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48445 should display in the menu
48447 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48449 \begin_inset space ~
48457 \begin_layout Subsection
48461 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48465 \begin_layout Standard
48468 Restore window layouts and geometries
48471 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48472 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48476 \begin_layout Standard
48479 Restore cursor positions
48481 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48485 \begin_layout Standard
48488 Load opened files from last session
48490 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48494 \begin_layout Standard
48497 Clear all session information
48499 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48500 sessions (cursor positions, names
48501 of last opened documents, etc.).
48504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48508 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48513 \begin_inset Index idx
48516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48525 \begin_layout Standard
48528 Backup original documents when saving
48530 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48531 it was saved the last time.
48532 It is stored in the
48535 \begin_inset space ~
48541 \begin_inset space ~
48545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48547 reference "sec:Paths"
48551 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48554 \begin_inset space ~
48560 The backup file has the file extension
48561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48575 \begin_layout Standard
48578 Backup documents, every
48580 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48583 \begin_layout Standard
48586 Save documents compressed by default
48588 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48589 \begin_inset space ~
48593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48595 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48600 This applies to newly created documents only.
48601 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48605 Windows & work area
48608 \begin_layout Standard
48611 Open documents in tabs
48613 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48617 \begin_layout Standard
48622 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 \begin_inset space ~
48633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48635 reference "sec:Paths"
48639 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48646 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48647 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48648 of \SpecialChar LyX
48650 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48651 instance is created for each file.
48654 \begin_layout Standard
48657 Single close-tab button
48659 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48669 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48670 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48671 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48675 \begin_layout Standard
48676 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48684 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48685 before the change takes effect.
48693 \begin_layout Standard
48698 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48700 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48702 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48706 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48707 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48708 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48711 \begin_layout Subsection
48713 \begin_inset Index idx
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48725 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48732 \begin_layout Standard
48733 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48737 \begin_layout Standard
48738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48746 This section only deals with the fonts
48750 the \SpecialChar LyX
48752 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48767 \begin_layout Standard
48768 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48785 (depends on the system) as its
48788 \begin_inset space ~
48804 \begin_layout Standard
48805 You can change the font size with the
48812 \begin_layout Standard
48817 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48822 points have the size of 1
48823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48827 \begin_inset space ~
48831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48833 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48838 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48843 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48844 \begin_inset space ~
48848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48850 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48857 \begin_layout Subsection
48859 \begin_inset Index idx
48862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48863 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48870 \begin_inset Index idx
48873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48882 \begin_layout Standard
48883 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48884 by choosing an item in the
48885 list and selecting the
48892 \begin_layout Standard
48893 By checking the option
48897 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48900 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48905 \begin_inset space ~
48910 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48913 \begin_layout Subsection
48915 \begin_inset Index idx
48918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48927 \begin_layout Standard
48928 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48932 \begin_layout Standard
48937 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48938 This feature is described in section
48939 \begin_inset space ~
48943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48945 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48952 \begin_layout Standard
48953 Checking the option
48956 \begin_inset space ~
48960 \begin_inset space ~
48964 \begin_inset space ~
48969 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48972 \begin_layout Section
48974 \begin_inset Index idx
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 \begin_layout Subsection
48990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48994 \begin_layout Standard
48997 Cursor follows scrollbar
48999 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49003 \begin_layout Standard
49004 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49005 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49006 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49009 \begin_layout Standard
49012 Scroll below end of document
49014 is self-explanatory.
49017 \begin_layout Standard
49018 In \SpecialChar LyX
49019 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49026 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49028 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49029 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49030 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49034 \begin_layout Standard
49036 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49039 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49041 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49042 paste operations (i.
49043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49046 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49047 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49048 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49049 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49050 dissolving from insets.
49055 \begin_layout Standard
49058 Sort environments alphabetically
49060 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49063 \begin_layout Standard
49066 Group environments by their category
49068 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49071 \begin_layout Standard
49076 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49087 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49091 \begin_layout Standard
49092 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49097 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49098 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49102 \begin_layout Subsection
49104 \begin_inset Index idx
49107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49114 \begin_inset Index idx
49117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49118 Settings ! Shortcuts
49126 \begin_layout Standard
49131 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49133 Several binding files are available, among them:
49136 \begin_layout Description
49137 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49140 \begin_layout Description
49141 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49153 \begin_layout Description
49154 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49165 \begin_layout Standard
49166 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49171 , and binding files for special languages.
49172 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49177 \begin_inset space \space{}
49181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49189 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49190 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49191 will try to use the appropriate binding
49195 \begin_layout Standard
49196 Some binding files, like
49200 , only have a limited scope.
49201 When looking at the end of the file
49205 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49208 \begin_layout Standard
49212 \begin_inset space ~
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49221 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49222 in the selected key binding file.
49225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49229 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49234 \begin_inset Index idx
49237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49238 Key Bindings ! Editing
49246 \begin_layout Standard
49247 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49248 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49249 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49250 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49253 Show key-bindings containing
49256 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49257 Insert there for example as keyword
49258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49265 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49266 functions that contain
49267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49275 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49276 All \SpecialChar LyX
49277 functions are also listed in the file
49282 that you will find in the
49289 \begin_layout Standard
49290 For example, to add the shortcut
49298 , select the function and press the
49303 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49304 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49307 \begin_layout Standard
49308 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49309 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49311 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49312 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49314 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49319 \begin_layout Standard
49320 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49323 \begin_layout Standard
49324 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49326 The syntax of the entries is:
49329 \begin_layout Standard
49335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49354 \begin_layout Standard
49355 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49356 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49384 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49385 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49386 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49387 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49389 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49393 , you needed to specify it as
49398 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49401 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49404 \begin_layout Subsection
49406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49408 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49413 \begin_inset Index idx
49416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49423 \begin_inset Index idx
49426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49427 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49435 \begin_layout Standard
49436 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49437 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49438 provides keyboard maps.
49439 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49440 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49443 \begin_inset space ~
49447 \begin_inset space ~
49452 and select the keyboard map file named
49459 \begin_layout Standard
49468 keyboard map and, if you use the
49472 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49475 arg "keymap-primary"
49481 arg "keymap-secondary"
49484 respectively or toggle between them with
49487 arg "keymap-toggle"
49493 \begin_layout Standard
49494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49502 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49511 \begin_layout Standard
49512 You can also specify the mouse
49514 Wheel scrolling speed
49517 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49521 Middle mouse button pasting
49523 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49524 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49527 \begin_layout Standard
49535 \begin_inset space ~
49539 \begin_inset space ~
49544 you can select a key for zooming.
49545 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49548 \begin_layout Subsection
49552 \begin_layout Standard
49553 Input completion is described in section
49554 \begin_inset space ~
49558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49560 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49567 \begin_layout Section
49569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49576 \begin_inset Index idx
49579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49586 \begin_inset Index idx
49589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49598 \begin_layout Standard
49599 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49600 are normally determined during
49602 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49605 \begin_layout Description
49607 \begin_inset space ~
49610 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49611 's working directory.
49612 It is the default when you
49623 \begin_inset space ~
49631 \begin_layout Description
49633 \begin_inset space ~
49636 templates This directory
49637 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49638 contains the templates that are shown
49639 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49640 will be opened when you use the menu
49641 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49646 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49648 \begin_inset space ~
49652 \begin_inset space ~
49660 \begin_layout Description
49662 \begin_inset space ~
49665 files This directory
49666 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49667 will be opened when you use the
49668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49669 contains the example files that are listed in
49672 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49683 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49685 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49691 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49693 \begin_inset Newline newline
49697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49709 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49710 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49720 \begin_layout Description
49722 \begin_inset space ~
49726 \begin_inset Index idx
49729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49735 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49736 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49737 \begin_inset space ~
49741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49743 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49751 will be used to save the backups.
49752 \begin_inset Newline newline
49755 Backup files have the ending
49756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49766 \begin_layout Description
49768 \begin_inset space ~
49771 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49772 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49774 \begin_inset Newline newline
49781 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49787 You can edit this file with the program
49796 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49797 in its preferences under
49800 \begin_inset space ~
49806 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49811 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49813 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49814 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49820 and \SpecialChar LyX
49821 need to be running the same time.
49822 \begin_inset Newline newline
49825 The pipe is also used for the
49829 feature, see section
49830 \begin_inset space ~
49834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49836 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49841 \begin_inset Newline newline
49844 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49845 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49846 \begin_inset Newline newline
49862 \begin_layout Description
49864 \begin_inset space ~
49867 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49870 \begin_layout Description
49872 \begin_inset space ~
49875 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49876 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49877 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49880 \begin_layout Description
49882 \begin_inset space ~
49885 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49891 You only need to specify it if you are using
49895 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49897 For \SpecialChar LyX
49902 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49906 \begin_layout Description
49908 \begin_inset space ~
49911 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49912 When \SpecialChar LyX
49913 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49914 to find it on the system.
49915 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49917 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49926 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49927 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49930 \begin_layout Description
49932 \begin_inset space ~
49935 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49936 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49937 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49938 code or in the document
49940 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49942 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49943 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49944 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49945 scanned for the input files.
49946 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49947 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49949 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49950 compilation may fail for some documents.
49953 \begin_layout Section
49957 \begin_layout Standard
49958 Here you can insert your
49967 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49975 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49979 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49982 \begin_layout Section
49984 \begin_inset Index idx
49987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49988 Language ! Settings
49994 \begin_inset Index idx
49997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49998 Settings ! Language
50006 \begin_layout Subsection
50008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50010 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50017 \begin_layout Description
50019 \begin_inset space ~
50023 \begin_inset space ~
50026 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50028 You can find its actual translation status here:
50029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50031 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50037 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50043 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50044 LaTeX Language Support
50049 \begin_layout Description
50051 \begin_inset space ~
50054 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50055 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50056 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50057 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50074 The most widespread language package is
50079 \begin_inset Index idx
50082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50089 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50091 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50092 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50093 come with the alternative
50099 \begin_inset Index idx
50102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50104 packages ! polyglossia
50109 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50110 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50116 The available selections are described in section
50117 \begin_inset space ~
50121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50123 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50130 \begin_layout Description
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50137 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50138 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50140 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50144 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50148 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50150 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50154 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50155 that is used to switch to a different language
50156 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50157 to start the package
50161 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50162 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50166 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50167 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50170 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50182 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50190 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50193 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50195 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50217 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50218 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50225 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50226 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50231 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50236 , this setting is ignored.
50241 \begin_layout Description
50243 \begin_inset space ~
50247 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50254 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50255 Use this if the language switch set in
50259 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50263 's alternative command
50267 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50268 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50271 end{otherlanguage*}
50275 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50276 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50277 command toggles the package on and off
50278 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50279 Empty by default, as
50283 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50285 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50290 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50296 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50301 , this setting is ignored.
50306 \begin_layout Description
50308 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50310 \begin_inset space ~
50314 \begin_inset space ~
50317 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50321 \begin_layout Description
50323 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50325 \begin_inset space ~
50329 \begin_inset space ~
50332 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50338 \begin_layout Description
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50344 \begin_inset space ~
50348 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50350 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50353 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50354 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50357 to the document class options
50358 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50359 rather than the language package options.
50360 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50364 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50365 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50367 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50368 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50370 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50375 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50376 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50385 \begin_layout Description
50387 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50389 \begin_inset space ~
50393 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50409 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50411 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50414 this option is set,
50415 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50416 the language switch defined in
50419 \begin_inset space ~
50424 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50425 to the document language.
50426 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50427 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50430 \begin_inset space ~
50435 or if a package resets the document language.
50436 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50437 usually should be the document language).
50438 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50439 documents start with the chosen document language.
50440 When this option is not set, the
50443 \begin_inset space ~
50448 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50450 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50463 \begin_layout Description
50465 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50467 \begin_inset space ~
50471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50473 \begin_inset space ~
50477 \begin_inset space ~
50481 \begin_inset space ~
50487 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50491 \begin_inset space ~
50495 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50496 Set document language explicitly
50502 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50504 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50510 \begin_inset space ~
50516 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50522 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50524 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50527 the end of the document.
50528 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50533 \paragraph_spacing single
50535 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50541 \begin_layout Description
50543 \begin_inset space ~
50547 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50549 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50553 \begin_inset space ~
50557 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50559 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50561 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50565 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50568 in a language different
50569 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50571 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50574 the document language will be
50575 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50576 marked (by default with a blue
50579 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50581 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50585 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50589 \begin_layout Description
50591 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50593 \begin_inset space ~
50597 \begin_inset space ~
50601 \begin_inset space ~
50604 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50605 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50606 switched via the operating system.
50607 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50612 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50613 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50618 \begin_layout Description
50620 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50622 \begin_inset space ~
50626 \begin_inset space ~
50629 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50630 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50635 \begin_layout Description
50637 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50639 \begin_inset space ~
50643 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50645 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50649 \begin_inset space ~
50653 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50654 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50655 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50657 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50661 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50663 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50664 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50666 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50667 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50668 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50670 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50675 \begin_layout Standard
50680 means that the cursor
50681 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50682 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50683 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50688 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50689 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50693 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50695 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50696 specific case always means: move
50700 in text (even if this means:
50706 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50707 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50708 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50709 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50710 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50722 \begin_layout Standard
50724 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50729 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50730 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50731 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50735 ) when coming from the left.
50736 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50738 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50739 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50740 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50747 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50751 \begin_layout Description
50753 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50755 \begin_inset space ~
50759 \begin_inset space ~
50762 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50763 separator alignment).
50764 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50769 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50770 (static) custom character here.
50773 \begin_layout Description
50775 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50777 \begin_inset space ~
50781 \begin_inset space ~
50784 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50790 \begin_layout Subsection
50794 \begin_layout Standard
50795 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50802 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50809 \begin_layout Section
50813 \begin_layout Subsection
50815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50817 name "subsec:General-output"
50824 \begin_layout Description
50826 \begin_inset space ~
50829 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50831 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50833 \begin_inset space ~
50839 For a detailed description see section
50841 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50846 \begin_inset space ~
50854 \begin_layout Description
50856 \begin_inset space ~
50859 Options Options for the program
50863 that is used for the export format
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50874 reference "subsec:Export"
50879 Possible options are listed in the
50884 \begin_inset Newline newline
50888 \begin_inset Flex URL
50891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50893 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50903 \begin_layout Description
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50909 \begin_inset space ~
50912 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50915 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50916 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50918 \begin_inset space ~
50924 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50927 \begin_layout Description
50929 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50931 \begin_inset space ~
50935 \begin_inset Index idx
50938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50945 \begin_inset Index idx
50948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50949 Settings ! Date format
50954 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50955 \begin_inset Newline newline
50959 \begin_inset Flex URL
50962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50964 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50970 \begin_inset Newline newline
50973 For example the format
50974 \begin_inset Newline newline
50978 \begin_inset Newline newline
50981 prints the date as day/month/year.
50986 \begin_layout Description
50988 \begin_inset space ~
50992 \begin_inset space ~
50995 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50996 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50999 \begin_layout Subsection
51005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51007 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51012 \begin_inset Index idx
51015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51016 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51025 \begin_layout Description
51027 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51029 \begin_inset space ~
51037 \begin_inset space ~
51041 \begin_inset space ~
51044 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51049 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51070 are used for Cyrillic.
51071 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51084 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51086 sets up in the background.
51087 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51092 \begin_layout Description
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51098 \begin_inset space ~
51102 \begin_inset space ~
51106 \begin_inset space ~
51109 options They only have an effect when the program
51113 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51116 \begin_layout Standard
51117 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51118 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51119 manuals of the applications.
51122 \begin_layout Description
51124 \begin_inset space ~
51127 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51128 \begin_inset space ~
51132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51134 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51141 \begin_layout Description
51143 \begin_inset space ~
51146 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51147 \begin_inset space ~
51151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51153 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51160 \begin_layout Description
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51165 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51172 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51179 \begin_layout Description
51185 \begin_inset space ~
51188 command Command for the program
51190 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51193 that is described in the section
51195 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51200 Additional Features
51205 \begin_layout Standard
51206 There are additionally the following options:
51209 \begin_layout Description
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51215 \begin_inset space ~
51219 \begin_inset space ~
51223 \begin_inset space ~
51228 \begin_inset space ~
51231 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51249 to separate folders.
51250 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51252 \begin_inset Index idx
51255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51262 \begin_inset Index idx
51265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51274 \begin_layout Description
51276 \begin_inset space ~
51280 \begin_inset space ~
51284 \begin_inset space ~
51288 \begin_inset space ~
51292 \begin_inset space ~
51296 \begin_inset space ~
51299 changes Removes all manually set
51305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51308 \begin_inset space ~
51313 dialog when changing the document class.
51316 \begin_layout Section
51318 \begin_inset space ~
51322 \begin_inset Index idx
51325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51334 \begin_layout Subsection
51336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51338 name "subsec:Converters"
51343 \begin_inset Index idx
51346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51355 \begin_layout Standard
51356 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51357 from one format to another.
51358 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51359 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51366 \begin_inset space ~
51371 field and press the
51376 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51380 \begin_inset space ~
51385 drop-down list, modify the
51389 field and press the
51396 \begin_layout Standard
51399 Converter File Cache
51405 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51407 Maximum Age (in days
51410 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51411 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51414 \begin_layout Standard
51415 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51416 definition, is described in the section
51427 \begin_layout Subsection
51429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51431 name "sec:File-Formats"
51436 \begin_inset Index idx
51439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51446 \begin_inset Index idx
51449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51458 \begin_layout Standard
51459 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51469 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51472 \begin_layout Standard
51473 You can also define the
51475 Default output format
51477 that is used when you use
51479 View, Update, View Master Document
51483 Update Master Document
51489 menu or the toolbar.
51492 \begin_layout Standard
51493 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51504 \begin_layout Standard
51505 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51507 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51508 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51509 This is done by specifying a
51514 More about this is described in the section
51525 \begin_layout Chapter
51526 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51528 \begin_inset Index idx
51531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51540 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51547 \begin_layout Standard
51549 \begin_inset space ~
51553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51555 reference "tab:Units"
51559 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51560 and used in this documentation.
51563 \begin_layout Standard
51564 \begin_inset Float table
51571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51572 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51590 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 \begin_inset Tabular
51599 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51600 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51601 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51602 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51756 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52027 scaled point (65536
52028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52095 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 % of original image width
52224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52308 \begin_layout Standard
52309 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52312 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52319 \begin_layout Bibliography
52320 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52321 LatexCommand bibitem
52328 The \SpecialChar LyX
52330 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52333 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52339 \begin_inset Newline newline
52343 \begin_inset Flex URL
52346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52348 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52356 \begin_layout Bibliography
52357 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52358 LatexCommand bibitem
52359 key "latexcompanion"
52364 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52366 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52367 Companion Second Edition.
52370 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52373 \begin_layout Bibliography
52374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52375 LatexCommand bibitem
52381 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52384 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52388 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52391 \begin_layout Bibliography
52392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52393 LatexCommand bibitem
52402 : A Document Preparation System.
52405 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52408 \begin_layout Bibliography
52409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52410 LatexCommand bibitem
52420 The \SpecialChar TeX
52424 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52427 \begin_layout Bibliography
52428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52429 LatexCommand bibitem
52435 The \SpecialChar TeX
52437 \begin_inset Newline newline
52441 \begin_inset Flex URL
52444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52446 https://ctan.org/topic
52454 \begin_layout Bibliography
52455 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52456 LatexCommand bibitem
52462 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52464 \begin_inset Newline newline
52468 \begin_inset Flex URL
52471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52473 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52481 \begin_layout Bibliography
52482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52483 LatexCommand bibitem
52490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52492 name "Documentation"
52493 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52500 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52504 \begin_inset Newline newline
52508 \begin_inset Flex URL
52511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52513 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52521 \begin_layout Bibliography
52522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52523 LatexCommand bibitem
52530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52532 name "Documentation"
52533 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52538 how to use the program
52540 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52544 \begin_inset Newline newline
52548 \begin_inset Flex URL
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52553 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52561 \begin_layout Bibliography
52562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52563 LatexCommand bibitem
52570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52572 name "Documentation"
52573 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52578 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52584 \begin_inset Index idx
52587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52589 packages ! biblatex
52595 \begin_inset Newline newline
52599 \begin_inset Flex URL
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52604 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52612 \begin_layout Bibliography
52613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52614 LatexCommand bibitem
52621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52623 name "Documentation"
52624 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52629 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52635 \begin_inset Index idx
52638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52646 \begin_inset Newline newline
52650 \begin_inset Flex URL
52653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52655 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52663 \begin_layout Bibliography
52664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52665 LatexCommand bibitem
52672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52674 name "Documentation"
52675 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52685 \begin_inset Newline newline
52689 \begin_inset Flex URL
52692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52694 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52702 \begin_layout Bibliography
52703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52704 LatexCommand bibitem
52705 key "makeindex-man"
52711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52714 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52724 \begin_inset Newline newline
52728 \begin_inset Flex URL
52731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52733 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52741 \begin_layout Bibliography
52742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52743 LatexCommand bibitem
52750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52752 name "Documentation"
52753 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52763 \begin_inset Newline newline
52767 \begin_inset Flex URL
52770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52772 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52780 \begin_layout Bibliography
52781 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52782 LatexCommand bibitem
52789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52791 name "Documentation"
52792 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52797 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52799 \begin_inset Newline newline
52803 \begin_inset Flex URL
52806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52808 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52816 \begin_layout Bibliography
52817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52818 LatexCommand bibitem
52825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52827 name "Documentation"
52828 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52833 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52839 \begin_inset Index idx
52842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52850 \begin_inset Newline newline
52854 \begin_inset Flex URL
52857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52859 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52867 \begin_layout Bibliography
52868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52869 LatexCommand bibitem
52876 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52878 name "Documentation"
52879 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52884 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52890 \begin_inset Index idx
52893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52895 packages ! enumitem
52901 \begin_inset Newline newline
52905 \begin_inset Flex URL
52908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52910 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52918 \begin_layout Bibliography
52919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52920 LatexCommand bibitem
52927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52929 name "Documentation"
52930 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52935 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52941 \begin_inset Index idx
52944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52946 packages ! fancyhdr
52952 \begin_inset Newline newline
52956 \begin_inset Flex URL
52959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52969 \begin_layout Bibliography
52970 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52971 LatexCommand bibitem
52978 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52980 name "Documentation"
52981 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52986 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52992 \begin_inset Index idx
52995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52997 packages ! hyperref
53003 \begin_inset Newline newline
53007 \begin_inset Flex URL
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53012 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53020 \begin_layout Bibliography
53021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53022 LatexCommand bibitem
53029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53031 name "Documentation"
53032 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53037 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53043 \begin_inset Index idx
53046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53048 packages ! microtype
53054 \begin_inset Newline newline
53058 \begin_inset Flex URL
53061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53063 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53071 \begin_layout Bibliography
53072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53073 LatexCommand bibitem
53080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53082 name "Documentation"
53083 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53088 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53094 \begin_inset Index idx
53097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53105 \begin_inset Newline newline
53109 \begin_inset Flex URL
53112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53114 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53122 \begin_layout Bibliography
53123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53124 LatexCommand bibitem
53131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53133 name "Documentation"
53134 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53139 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53145 \begin_inset Index idx
53148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53150 packages ! prettyref
53156 \begin_inset Newline newline
53160 \begin_inset Flex URL
53163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53165 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53173 \begin_layout Bibliography
53174 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53175 LatexCommand bibitem
53182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53184 name "Documentation"
53185 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53190 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53196 \begin_inset Index idx
53199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53201 packages ! refstyle
53207 \begin_inset Newline newline
53211 \begin_inset Flex URL
53214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53216 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53224 \begin_layout Bibliography
53225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53226 LatexCommand bibitem
53233 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53236 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53241 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53243 \begin_inset Newline newline
53247 \begin_inset Flex URL
53250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53252 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53260 \begin_layout Bibliography
53261 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53262 LatexCommand bibitem
53269 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53272 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53277 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53279 \begin_inset Newline newline
53283 \begin_inset Flex URL
53286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53288 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53296 \begin_layout Bibliography
53297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53298 LatexCommand bibitem
53305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53308 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53313 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53314 for Cyrillic languages:
53315 \begin_inset Newline newline
53319 \begin_inset Flex URL
53322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53324 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53332 \begin_layout Bibliography
53333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53334 LatexCommand bibitem
53341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53344 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53349 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53351 \begin_inset Newline newline
53355 \begin_inset Flex URL
53358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53368 \begin_layout Bibliography
53369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53370 LatexCommand bibitem
53377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53380 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53385 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53387 \begin_inset Newline newline
53391 \begin_inset Flex URL
53394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53396 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53404 \begin_layout Bibliography
53405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53406 LatexCommand bibitem
53413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53416 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53421 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53423 \begin_inset Newline newline
53427 \begin_inset Flex URL
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53440 \begin_layout Standard
53441 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53475 \begin_inset Note Note
53478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53485 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53486 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53487 bibliography is the second one:
53495 \begin_layout Standard
53496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53497 LatexCommand bibtex
53498 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53499 options "biblio/alphadin"
53506 \begin_layout Standard
53507 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53511 \begin_layout Standard
53515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53521 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53530 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53538 \begin_inset Note Note
53541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53542 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53543 \begin_inset space ~
53547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53549 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53561 \begin_layout Standard
53562 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53563 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53569 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53570 LatexCommand printindex